[go: up one dir, main page]

WO2024167378A1 - Method and apparatus for efficiently transmitting configuration information of candidate cells for l1/l2-based mobility support in next-generation mobile communication system - Google Patents

Method and apparatus for efficiently transmitting configuration information of candidate cells for l1/l2-based mobility support in next-generation mobile communication system Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2024167378A1
WO2024167378A1 PCT/KR2024/095075 KR2024095075W WO2024167378A1 WO 2024167378 A1 WO2024167378 A1 WO 2024167378A1 KR 2024095075 W KR2024095075 W KR 2024095075W WO 2024167378 A1 WO2024167378 A1 WO 2024167378A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
cell
information
candidate
configuration
rrc
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Ceased
Application number
PCT/KR2024/095075
Other languages
French (fr)
Korean (ko)
Inventor
진승리
에기월아닐
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Samsung Electronics Co Ltd
Original Assignee
Samsung Electronics Co Ltd
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Samsung Electronics Co Ltd filed Critical Samsung Electronics Co Ltd
Publication of WO2024167378A1 publication Critical patent/WO2024167378A1/en
Anticipated expiration legal-status Critical
Ceased legal-status Critical Current

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W36/00Hand-off or reselection arrangements
    • H04W36/08Reselecting an access point
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W16/00Network planning, e.g. coverage or traffic planning tools; Network deployment, e.g. resource partitioning or cells structures
    • H04W16/24Cell structures
    • H04W16/28Cell structures using beam steering
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W36/00Hand-off or reselection arrangements
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W36/00Hand-off or reselection arrangements
    • H04W36/0005Control or signalling for completing the hand-off
    • H04W36/0011Control or signalling for completing the hand-off for data sessions of end-to-end connection
    • H04W36/0022Control or signalling for completing the hand-off for data sessions of end-to-end connection for transferring data sessions between adjacent core network technologies
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W36/00Hand-off or reselection arrangements
    • H04W36/34Reselection control
    • H04W36/38Reselection control by fixed network equipment

Definitions

  • the present disclosure relates to a method and device for providing configuration information for supporting mobility of a terminal.
  • 5G mobile communication technology defines a wide frequency band to enable fast transmission speeds and new services, and can be implemented not only in the sub-6GHz frequency band, such as 3.5 gigahertz (3.5GHz), but also in the ultra-high frequency band called millimeter wave (mmWave), such as 28GHz and 39GHz ('Above 6GHz').
  • mmWave millimeter wave
  • mmWave millimeter wave
  • 28GHz and 39GHz 'Above 6GHz'
  • 6G mobile communication technology which is called the system after 5G communication (Beyond 5G)
  • implementation in the terahertz band for example, the 3 terahertz (3THz) band at 95GHz
  • 3THz the 3 terahertz
  • eMBB enhanced Mobile Broadband
  • URLLC Ultra-Reliable Low-Latency Communications
  • mMTC massive Machine-Type Communications
  • beamforming and massive MIMO to mitigate path loss of radio waves in ultra-high frequency bands and increase the transmission distance of radio waves
  • numerologies such as operation of multiple subcarrier intervals
  • dynamic operation of slot formats for efficient use of ultra-high frequency resources
  • initial access technology to support multi-beam transmission and wideband
  • definition and operation of BWP Bitth Part
  • new channel coding methods such as LDPC (Low Density Parity Check) codes for large-capacity data transmission and Polar Code for reliable transmission of control information
  • L2 pre-processing L2 Standardization has been made for network slicing, which provides dedicated networks specialized for specific services, and pre-processing.
  • V2X Vehicle-to-Everything
  • NR-U New Radio Unlicensed
  • UE Power Saving NR terminal low power consumption technology
  • NTN Non-Terrestrial Network
  • Standardization of wireless interface architecture/protocols for technologies such as the Industrial Internet of Things (IIoT) to support new services through linkage and convergence with other industries, Integrated Access and Backhaul (IAB) to provide nodes for expanding network service areas by integrating wireless backhaul links and access links, Mobility Enhancement including Conditional Handover and Dual Active Protocol Stack (DAPS) handover, and 2-step RACH for NR to simplify random access procedures is also in progress, and standardization of system architecture/services for 5G baseline architecture (e.g. Service based Architecture, Service based Interface) for grafting Network Functions Virtualization (NFV) and Software-Defined Networking (SDN) technologies, and Mobile Edge Computing (MEC) that provides services based on the location of the terminal is also in progress.
  • 5G baseline architecture e.g. Service based Architecture, Service based Interface
  • NFV Network Functions Virtualization
  • SDN Software-Defined Networking
  • MEC Mobile Edge Computing
  • the terminal when a terminal is currently receiving a service from a specific beam from a serving cell, the terminal can measure a beam belonging to another cell and report it to the base station of the current serving cell, and if the base station determines that a beam of a neighboring cell is better, the base station can instruct the terminal to perform a cell change to the corresponding cell through L1/L2 signaling.
  • RRC configuration information particularly, cell physical configuration, radio bearer configuration, and measurement configuration
  • one purpose of the present disclosure is to propose an effective message structure that can transmit only changes in specific RRC configuration information for candidate cells when transmitting information or settings applied when performing handover to neighboring cells to a terminal.
  • a method of a terminal comprises the steps of: receiving, from a base station, a first radio resource control (RRC) message including first information on LTM (layer 1/layer 2 triggered mobility) candidate setting; receiving, from the base station, a second RRC message including second information on the LTM candidate setting; and reporting, to the base station, L1 (layer 1) measurement performed on candidate cells based on the second information.
  • RRC radio resource control
  • the second information includes an RRC configuration for updating the LTM candidate configuration
  • the RRC configuration including cell group configuration information for the candidate cells may further include updated information of at least one of a radio bearer configuration or a measurement configuration included in the first RRC message.
  • the method includes: transmitting, to a terminal, a first radio resource control (RRC) message including first information on LTM (layer 1/layer 2 triggered mobility) candidate configuration; acquiring an RRC configuration for updating the LTM candidate configuration; transmitting, to the terminal, a second RRC message including second information on the LTM candidate configuration, the second RRC message including the RRC configuration; and receiving, from the terminal, an L1 (layer 1) measurement report for candidate cells based on the second information, wherein the RRC configuration including cell group configuration information for the candidate cells may further include updated information on at least one of a radio bearer configuration or a measurement configuration included in the first RRC message.
  • RRC radio resource control
  • a terminal comprising: a transceiver; and a control unit configured to control the transceiver to receive, from a base station, a first radio resource control (RRC) message including first information about LTM (layer 1/layer 2 triggered mobility) candidate configuration, and to control the transceiver to receive, from the base station, a second RRC message including second information about the LTM candidate configuration, and to control the transceiver to report, to the base station, L1 (layer 1) measurement performed on candidate cells based on the second information, wherein the second information includes an RRC configuration that updates the LTM candidate configuration, and the RRC configuration including cell group configuration information for the candidate cells may further include updated information on at least one of a radio bearer configuration or a measurement configuration included in the first RRC message.
  • RRC radio resource control
  • a base station a transceiver; and a control unit configured to control the transceiver to transmit, to a terminal, a first radio resource control (RRC) message including first information on LTM (layer 1/layer 2 triggered mobility) candidate configuration, obtain an RRC configuration that updates the LTM candidate configuration, control the transceiver to transmit, to the terminal, a second RRC message including second information on the LTM candidate configuration, the RRC configuration, and receive, from the terminal, an L1 (layer 1) measurement report for candidate cells based on the second information, wherein the RRC configuration including cell group configuration information for the candidate cells may further include updated information on at least one of a radio bearer configuration or a measurement configuration included in the first RRC message.
  • RRC radio resource control
  • RRC configuration information for LTM (L1/L2 triggered mobility) candidate cells particularly, physical configuration of the cell, radio bearer configuration, and measurement configuration
  • only changes in specific RRC configuration information can be transmitted, so that the overhead of RRC configuration information actually transmitted to the terminal can be significantly reduced.
  • FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating the structure of a next-generation mobile communication system to which the present disclosure is applied.
  • FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a wireless protocol structure of a next-generation mobile communication system to which the present disclosure can be applied.
  • FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating the structure of another next-generation mobile communication system to which the present disclosure can be applied.
  • FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating a scenario for inter-cell beam management referred to in the present disclosure, in which a terminal transmits and receives data through a beam of a TRP (transmission/reception point) of a neighboring cell that supports beam changing based on L1/L2 while maintaining a connection state with a serving cell.
  • TRP transmission/reception point
  • FIG. 5a is a diagram illustrating a scenario in which a terminal transmits and receives data by changing a serving cell and beam to a TRP of a cell that supports L1/L2-based beam changing.
  • FIG. 5b is a diagram illustrating a scenario in which a terminal transmits and receives data by changing a serving cell and beam to a TRP of a cell that supports L1/L2-based beam changing.
  • FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a first LTM candidate cell RRC configuration method and procedure for providing effective RRC configuration update for configuration of surrounding cells for L1/L2-based handover in an intra-CU scenario, as an example 1 applied to the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a second LTM candidate cell RRC configuration method and procedure for providing effective RRC configuration update for configuration of surrounding cells for L1/L2 based handover in an intra-CU scenario, as Example 2 applied to the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 8 is a diagram illustrating a first LTM candidate cell RRC configuration method and procedure for providing effective RRC configuration update for configuration of surrounding cells for L1/L2 based handover in an inter-CU scenario, as an example 3 applied to the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating a second LTM candidate cell RRC configuration method and procedure for providing effective RRC configuration update for configuration of neighboring cells for L1/L2 based handover in an inter-CU scenario, as Example 4 applied to the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating the overall terminal operation for performing L1/L2-based beam changing and handover, applied to examples of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating base station operation applied to examples of the present disclosure.
  • Fig. 12 is a block diagram illustrating the internal structure of a terminal to which the present disclosure is applied.
  • Figure 13 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a base station according to the present disclosure.
  • the present invention uses terms and names defined in the 3GPP LTE (3rd Generation Partnership Project Long Term Evolution) standard.
  • the present invention is not limited by the above terms and names, and can be equally applied to systems that comply with other standards.
  • Figure 1 is a drawing illustrating the structure of a next-generation mobile communication system to which the present invention is applied.
  • a wireless access network of a next-generation mobile communication system is composed of a next-generation base station (New Radio Node B, hereinafter referred to as NR NB, 1a-10) and an NR CN (New Radio Core Network, or NG CN: Next Generation Core Network, 1a-05).
  • a user terminal (New Radio User Equipment, hereinafter referred to as NR UE or terminal, 1a-15) accesses an external network through an NR NB (1a-10) and an NR CN (1a-05).
  • NR NB (1a-10) corresponds to eNB (Evolved Node B) of the existing LTE system.
  • NR NB is connected to NR UE (1a-15) via a wireless channel and can provide a service that is superior to the existing Node B.
  • a device that collects status information such as buffer status, available transmission power status, and channel status of UEs and performs scheduling is required, and this is handled by NR NB (1a-10).
  • One NR NB usually controls multiple cells.
  • orthogonal frequency division multiplexing OFDM
  • beamforming technology can be grafted.
  • AMC adaptive modulation and coding
  • NR CN (1a-05) performs functions such as mobility support, bearer setup, and QoS setup.
  • NR CN is a device that handles various control functions as well as mobility management functions for terminals and is connected to multiple base stations.
  • the next-generation mobile communication system can be linked with the existing LTE system, and NR CN is connected to MME (1a-25) through a network interface.
  • MME is connected to the existing base station, eNB (1a-30).
  • FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a wireless protocol structure of a next-generation mobile communication system to which the present disclosure can be applied.
  • the wireless protocol of the next-generation mobile communication system consists of NR SDAP (1b-01, 1b-45), NR PDCP (1b-05, 1b-40), NR RLC (1b-10, 1b-35), and NR MAC (1b-15, 1b-30) in the terminal and NR base station, respectively.
  • NR SDAP (1b-01, 1b-45) may include some of the following:
  • the terminal can be configured by an RRC message for each PDCP layer device, by bearer, or by logical channel, whether to use the header of the SDAP layer device or whether to use the function of the SDAP layer device, and if the SDAP header is configured, the terminal can be instructed to update or reset the QoS flow of the uplink and downlink and the mapping information for the data bearer by using a 1-bit indicator for reflecting NAS QoS (NAS reflective QoS) and a 1-bit indicator for reflecting AS QoS (AS reflective QoS) of the SDAP header.
  • the SDAP header can include QoS flow ID information indicating QoS.
  • the QoS information can be used as data processing priority, scheduling information, etc. to support a desired service.
  • NR PDCP (1b-05, 1b-40) may include some of the following functions:
  • the reordering function of the NR PDCP device above refers to the function of reordering PDCP PDUs received from a lower layer in order based on the PDCP SN (sequence number), and may include a function of transmitting data to an upper layer in the reordered order, or may include a function of transmitting data directly without considering the order, may include a function of recording lost PDCP PDUs by reordering the order, may include a function of reporting a status of lost PDCP PDUs to the transmitting side, and may include a function of requesting retransmission of lost PDCP PDUs.
  • NR RLC (1b-10, 1b-35)
  • the main functions of NR RLC (1b-10, 1b-35) may include some of the following functions:
  • the in-sequence delivery function of the NR RLC device above refers to the function of sequentially transmitting RLC SDUs received from a lower layer to an upper layer, and may include a function of reassembling and transmitting RLC SDUs when an RLC SDU is originally divided into multiple RLC SDUs and received, a function of rearranging received RLC PDUs based on RLC SN (sequence number) or PDCP SN (sequence number), a function of recording lost RLC PDUs by rearranging the sequence, a function of reporting the status of lost RLC PDUs to the transmitting side, a function of requesting retransmission of lost RLC PDUs, a function of sequentially transmitting only RLC SDUs up to the lost RLC SDU to an upper layer in case of a lost RLC SDU, or a function of sequentially transmitting all RLC SDUs received before the timer starts if a predetermined timer expires even when a lost RLC SDU
  • the RLC PDUs may be processed in the order they are received (in the order of arrival, regardless of the order of the sequence number) and delivered to the PDCP device regardless of the order (Out-of sequence delivery).
  • the segments stored in the buffer or to be received later may be received, reconstructed into a single complete RLC PDU, processed, and delivered to the PDCP device.
  • the NR RLC layer may not include a concatenation function, and the function may be performed in the NR MAC layer or replaced with a multiplexing function of the NR MAC layer.
  • the out-of-sequence delivery function of the NR RLC device mentioned above refers to the function of directly delivering RLC SDUs received from a lower layer to an upper layer regardless of the order, and may include a function of reassembling and delivering multiple RLC SDUs when an original RLC SDU is received divided into multiple RLC SDUs, and may include a function of storing and arranging the RLC SN or PDCP SN of received RLC PDUs to record lost RLC PDUs.
  • NR MAC (1b-15, 1b-30) can be connected to multiple NR RLC layer devices configured in one terminal, and the main functions of NR MAC can include some of the following functions.
  • the NR PHY layer (1b-20, 1b-25) can perform operations of channel coding and modulating upper layer data, converting it into OFDM symbols and transmitting it over a wireless channel, or demodulating and channel decoding OFDM symbols received over a wireless channel and transmitting them to a higher layer.
  • FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating the structure of another next-generation mobile communication system to which the present disclosure can be applied.
  • a cell served by an NR gNB (1c-05) operating on a beam basis may be composed of multiple TRPs (Transmission Reception Points, 1c-10, 1c-15, 1c-20, 1c-25, 1c-30, 1c-35, 1c-40).
  • TRPs (1c-10 to 1c-40) represent blocks that separate some of the functions of transmitting and receiving physical signals from an existing NR base station (eNB), and are composed of multiple antennas.
  • the NR gNB (1c-05) may be expressed as a CU (Central Unit), and the TRP may also be expressed as a DU (Distributed Unit).
  • the functions of the above NR gNB (1c-05) and TRP can be configured by separating each layer in the PDCP/RLC/MAC/PHY layers such as 1c-45.
  • the TRP can perform the function of the corresponding layer with only the PHY layer (1c-15, 1c-25), can perform the functions of the corresponding layers with only the PHY layer and the MAC layer (1c-10, 1c-35, 1c-40), or can perform the functions of the corresponding layers with only the PHY layer, the MAC layer, and the RLC layer (1c-20, 1c-30).
  • the TRP (1c-10 to 1c-40) can use beamforming technology that generates narrow beams in various directions using multiple transmit/receive antennas to transmit and receive data.
  • User terminals (1c-50) connect to NR gNBs (1c-05) and external networks via TRPs (1c-10 to 1c-40).
  • the NR gNBs (1c-05) collect and schedule status information, such as buffer status, available transmission power status, and channel status of terminals, to provide services to users, thereby supporting connections between the terminals and a core network (CN), particularly AMF/SMF (1c-50).
  • CN core network
  • the TRP in this disclosure will be explained on the premise that the structure (1c-15, 1c-25) can perform the function of the corresponding layer with only the PHY layer.
  • FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating a scenario for inter-cell beam management referred to in the present disclosure, in which a terminal transmits and receives data through a beam of a TRP (transmission/reception point) of a neighboring cell that supports L1/L2-based beam change while maintaining a connection state with a serving cell.
  • TRP transmission/reception point
  • TRP1-Cell1, TRP2-Cell2; 1d-10, 1d-15 distributed unit, 1d-05
  • the overall content of the present disclosure is also applicable to the inter-DU case (where each DU constitutes one TRP-Cell).
  • a non-serving cell TRP 2, Cell 2 supporting L1/L2 based mobility (beam change and serving cell change) will be described interchangeably as a neighbor cell, a non-serving cell, an additional cell with the PCI different from the serving cell, etc.
  • the existing terminal beam change procedure (1d-45) is such that the terminal (1d-20) is transmitting and receiving data in a connected state through TRP 1 (1d-10) of serving cell 1, and may be set to the optimal beam, TCI (transmission configuration indicator) state 1 (1d-25, 1d-30).
  • the terminal can receive configuration information for L3 channel measurement (RRM; radio resource management) for an additional cell (TRP 2-Cell 2, 1d-15) having a different PCI from the serving cell through RRC configuration information from the serving cell (1d-10), and perform the L3 measurement operation (1d-46) for the corresponding frequency and cell based on this.
  • RRM radio resource management
  • the serving cell can instruct (1d-47) a handover to the cell (TRP 2-Cell 2, 1d-15) based on the measurement value reported from the terminal (1d-20), and when the handover is completed accordingly, additional RRC configuration information can be transmitted (1d-48) to the terminal (1d-20) through TRP 2-Cell 2 (1d-15).
  • the additional RRC configuration information may include UL/DL configuration information in the corresponding cell, L1 measurement related settings (CSI-RS measurement and reporting), and in particular, TCI state configuration information for PDCCH (physical downlink control channel) and PDSCH (physical downlink shared channel) channels.
  • the terminal performs L1 measurement according to the settings (1d-49), and the base station updates the TCI state through L1/L2 signaling according to the measurement report from the terminal (1d-50).
  • the optimal beam, TCI state 2 (1d-40) can be indicated to the terminal.
  • the serving cell is Cell 1 before the handover, but becomes Cell 2 after the handover. However, even after the handover is completed, many procedures and time are required until the optimal beam is indicated to the terminal.
  • the improved beam changing technique (1d-55) considered in the present disclosure is as follows.
  • the terminal (1d-20) can receive beam settings associated with an additional cell (TRP 2-Cell 2, 1d-15) having a different PCI from the serving cell (1d-10) through RRC configuration information (1d-56) from the serving cell.
  • the beam settings associated with the additional cell (TRP 2-Cell 2, 1d-15) having a different PCI from the serving cell, i.e., the part that associates the TCI state corresponding to TRP2, can be applied by associating a new cell ID (Physical cell ID, PCI; additionalPCI-r17) as shown in Table 1 below.
  • a unified TCI state framework is applied for beam management between the cells.
  • the unified TCI state framework applies a common TCI state framework to uplink and downlink, and to common channels and dedicated channels, and can be set to either a Joint UL/DL mode as shown in Table 2 below or a separate UL/DL mode as shown in Tables 3-1 and 3-2 below.
  • Joint UL/DL mode Set UL and DL to share the same TCI settings (in PDSCH-Config)
  • UL and DL provide their own TCI configurations.
  • the TCI state for DL follows the configuration in dl-OrJoint-TCIStateList-r17 (in PDSCH-Config), and the TCI state for UL follows ul-TCI-StateList-r17 (in BWP-UplinkDedicated).
  • the terminal (1d-20) When the terminal (1d-20) is connected to the serving cell 1 via RRC (radio resource control), after the configuration for TRP 2-Cell 2 is provided, the terminal performs L1 measurement for the corresponding TRP 2-Cell 2 according to the configuration and reports the result to the serving cell (Cell 1, 1d-10) (1d-57). If the serving cell determines that a change from the serving cell beam (TCI state 1, 1d-25, 1d-30) to a specific beam (TCI state 2, 1d-35, 1d-40) of TRP 2 (Cell 2, 1d-15) is necessary based on the measurement result, the serving cell triggers the beam change and instructs the terminal to change the beam through L1/L2 signaling (1d-58).
  • RRC radio resource control
  • the terminal (1d-20) changes the beam to a specific beam (TCI state 2, 1d-40) of TRP 2 (Cell 2, 1d-15) through the instruction, and performs physical channel setting and upper layer setting operations related to the set beam. From this step, the terminal (1d-20) remains connected to the serving cell (Cell 1, 1d-10), but performs data transmission and reception (PDCCH/PDSCH reception, PUCCH (physical uplink control channel)/PUSCH (physical uplink shared channel) transmission) using the channel link of TRP 2 (Cell 2, 1d-15). However, transmission and reception for the common control channel are performed through the serving cell (Cell 1, 1d-10).
  • the terminal (1d-20) performs L3 measurement operation according to the measurement settings set in the independent serving cell (1d-59), receives a handover command message from the serving base station (Cell 1), and can perform a serving cell change to Cell 2 (1d-60).
  • the terminal (1d-20) performs data transmission and reception with a specific TRP 2 of Cell 2 supporting L1/L2-based mobility while connected to the serving cell, and can continuously use the corresponding beam even after the handover.
  • PCI neighboring cells
  • - Report type periodic report, semi-periodic report on PUCCH, semi-periodic report on PUSCH, aperiodic report on PUSCH (periodic, semi-persistent for PUCCH, semi-persistent for PUSCH, aperiodic)
  • FIG. 5A and FIG. 5B are examples referred to in the present disclosure, illustrating a scenario in which a terminal transmits and receives data by changing a serving cell and beam to a TRP of a cell that supports L1/L2-based beam switching.
  • a case in which multiple cells (TRP1-Cell1, TRP2-Cell2; 1e-10, 1e-15, 1e-40, 1e-45) exist within one DU (Distributed unit, 1e-05, 1e-35) is illustrated, but the overall content of the present disclosure can also be applied to an inter-DU (each DU constitutes one TRP-Cell) case.
  • the improved beam changing technique (1e-25, 1e-75) considered in these examples is as follows.
  • the terminal (1e-20) can receive common configuration information and dedicated configuration information for an additional cell (TRP 2-Cell 2, 1e-15) having a different PCI from the serving cell (1e-10) through RRC configuration information (1e-26). That is, configuration information corresponding to ServingCellID or candidateCellID (cell ID associated with PCI), ServingCellConfigCommon and ServingCellConfig can be provided to the terminal (1e-20) in advance.
  • the corresponding configuration information can be provided in the form of pre-configuration in the RRC configuration and can include configuration information for multiple cells.
  • the corresponding configuration is characterized in that it includes all configuration information (cell configuration, bearer configuration, measurement-related configuration, security key configuration, etc.) applied when the terminal moves (handovers) to the corresponding cell.
  • the setting includes the unified TCI state setting described in step 1d-56 and the settings related to L1 measurement and report.
  • a structure for providing configurations in advance for candidate neighboring cells where L1/L2 handover can be performed particularly a method for configuring cell group configurations (CellGroupConfig) including cell configurations, radio bearer configurations (RadioBearerConfig), and L3 measurement-related configurations (MeasConfig), is described in detail.
  • CellGroupConfig cell group configurations
  • RadioBearerConfig radio bearer configurations
  • MeasConfig L3 measurement-related configurations
  • a method for reducing signaling overhead by effectively setting RLC bearer configurations, logical channel configurations, MAC configurations, etc. that can be generally applied within the cell group configuration is also proposed.
  • the following examples in the present disclosure specify the above solutions by considering not only intra-CU but also inter-CU scenarios.
  • the terminal (1e-20) performs L1 measurement on the corresponding TRP 2-Cell 2 (1e-15) according to the settings received in step 1e-27 after the configuration for TRP 2-Cell 2 (1e-15) is provided while in an RRC-connected state to the serving cell 1 (1e-10) and reports the result to the serving cell (Cell 1, 1e-10). If the serving cell determines that a change from the serving cell beam (TCI state 1, 1e-25) to a specific beam (TCI state 2, 1e-40) of TRP 2 (Cell 2, 1e-15) is necessary based on the measurement result, it triggers a beam change in step 1e-28 and instructs the terminal (1e-20) to change the beam through L1/L2 signaling.
  • the terminal (1e-20) performs a beam change to TRP 2 (Cell 2, 1e-15) through the instruction, and performs data transmission and reception through the TRP 2 (Cell 2, 1e-15). At this time, the serving cell change does not occur, and the terminal (1e-20) is still RRC connected to the serving cell (Cell 1, 1e-10).
  • the terminal (1e-20) still performs L1 measurement for TRP 2-Cell 2 (1e-15) and reports the result to the serving cell (Cell 1, 1e-10). If the serving cell (Cell 1, 1e-10) determines that the L1 measurement reported by the terminal (1e-20) satisfies the triggering condition for handover to TRP 2-Cell 2 (1e-15) (the detailed operation is described in detail below), it instructs the terminal (1e-20) to perform a handover.
  • the instruction may be an L1/L2 message. That is, an instruction for instructing a handover may be included in the MAC (medium access control) CE (control element) or DCI (downlink control information).
  • the terminal (1e-50) can receive common configuration information and dedicated configuration information for an additional cell (TRP 2-Cell 2, 1e-45) having a different PCI from the serving cell (1e-40) through RRC configuration information (1e-76). That is, the configuration information corresponding to ServingCellID or candidateCellID (cell ID associated with PCI), ServingCellConfigCommon and ServingCellConfig can be provided to the terminal (1e-50) in advance.
  • the configuration information for the corresponding cell may be a configuration at the Cell group level (CellGroupConfig) rather than a cell-level configuration, or may be delivered as a configuration in the unit of an RRC configuration message (RRCReconfiguration).
  • the corresponding configuration information can be provided in the form of pre-configuration in the RRC configuration, and can include configuration information for multiple cells.
  • the corresponding configuration is characterized by including all configuration information (cell configuration, bearer configuration, security key configuration, etc.) that is applied when the terminal (1e-50) moves (handovers) to the corresponding cell.
  • the corresponding configuration includes the unified TCI state configuration described above in step 1d-56 of FIG. 1 and the configuration related to L1 measurement and report.
  • a structure for providing configurations for candidate neighboring cells where L1/L2 handover can be performed in advance, and in particular, a method for applying configuration information for a reference cell and delta configuration to the configurations for candidate neighboring cells is described in detail.
  • the terminal (1e-50 while in an RRC-connected state to the serving cell 1 (1e-40), performs L1 measurement on the corresponding TRP 2-Cell 2 (1e-45) according to the settings received in step 1e-77 after the settings for TRP 2-Cell 2 (1e-45) are provided, and reports the results to the serving cell (Cell 1, 1e-40).
  • the serving cell determines that a handover is necessary simultaneously with a beam change from the serving cell beam (TCI state 1, 1e-45) to a specific beam (TCI state 2, 1e-70) of TRP 2 (Cell 2, 1e-45) based on the measurement results, it triggers the beam change and handover in step 1e-78 and instructs the terminal (1e-50) to perform the beam change and handover through L1/L2 signaling.
  • the terminal (1e-50) performs a handover to TRP 2 (Cell 2, 1e-15) at the same time as changing the beam through the instruction, and performs data transmission and reception through the TRP 2 (Cell 2, 1e-15).
  • the terminal (1e-50) applies the configuration information for the target cell where the handover is performed, which was previously set in step 1e-76.
  • the terminal may perform random access or may omit random access to the target cell. The detailed operation is described in the drawings below.
  • the RRC configuration information for LTM candidate cells includes cell and cell group configuration, radio bearer configuration, and measurement-related configuration, and the entire operation in which at least one of the configuration information is changed is considered.
  • the following examples describe the entire procedure when applying an RRC configuration structure to provide effective RRC configuration updates for intra-CU scenarios and inter-CU scenarios, respectively.
  • the following two methods are proposed for the RRC configuration structure.
  • Wireless carrier settings and measurement-related settings are optionally managed as a separate list.
  • cell and cell group configurations include major cell-related configurations generated by the DU, which can be directly received by the base station through each LTM candidate cell, while radio bearer and layer 3 measurement-related configurations are generated by the CU.
  • radio bearer configuration may require split bearer configuration in LTM candidate cells, or may require an operation to set and change SRB 3 in the SCG of the LTM candidate cell when DC configuration is applied to the LTM candidate cells. In this case, an operation to update the radio bearer configuration for the LTM candidate cell is required.
  • a very large area is basically covered by one CU, and the frequencies included in the CU are diverse. Therefore, for L3 measurement-related configurations, it is effective to distinguish measurement configurations by frequency band for efficient measurement management by frequency band.
  • the intra-CU scenario is considered in Examples 1 and 2
  • the inter-CU scenario is considered in Examples 3 and 4.
  • LTM candidate cell RRC configuration method corresponds to a case where the RRC configuration message of the LTM candidate cell that the CU receives from the DU is CellGroupConfig, and when it is transmitted as an RRCReconfiguration message, a method that is a modification of the first LTM candidate cell RRC configuration method can be applied. That is, after the DU transmits the CellGroupConfig configuration to the CU through the F1AP interface, the DU receives the related radio carrier configuration and the measurement-related configuration from the CU again, generates one LTM candidate cell configuration in the DU, and then transmits an RRCReconfiguration message including the configuration to the CU through the F1AP interface.
  • FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a first LTM candidate cell RRC configuration method and procedure for providing effective RRC configuration update for configuration of surrounding cells for L1/L2 based handover in an intra-CU scenario, as an example 1 applied to the present disclosure.
  • the terminal (1f-01) in the RRC connection state performs data transmission and reception with the source cell 1 (DU 1, 1f-02), and transmits the measurement values for the serving cell and surrounding cells to the source cell 1 (DU 1, 1f-02) according to the layer 3 measurement and reporting set in step 1f-10.
  • the actual measurement values are transmitted to the CU (1f-03) of the base station. This is because the base station CU (1f-03) is responsible for RRC message processing and determines mobility.
  • the base station CU (1f-03) generates a message (L1/L2 config request message) requesting configuration information for L1/L2-based handover to the surrounding cells (DU 2, 1f-04; DU M, 1f-05) at step 1f-15 based on the measurement value report transmitted from the terminal (1f-01) and transmits the message to the F1 interface.
  • the candidate cell is shown in connection with the DU, but in reality, the candidate cell and the DU may be mapped 1:1 or multiple candidate cells may be included in one DU.
  • the message requesting configuration information for the above L1/L2-based handover may be an existing handover request message, a UE context request message, a UE context modification request message, etc., or a new F1 or Xn message.
  • the message requesting configuration information for the above L1/L2-based handover requests neighboring cells to be determined as candidate cells for L1/L2-based handover, and at the same time requests RRC configuration information that is applied when L1/L2-based handover is performed to the corresponding cell.
  • the RRC configuration information applied when L1/L2-based handover is performed can have one of the structures of cell level, cell group level, and RRC message level.
  • a message requesting configuration information for the L1/L2-based handover can simultaneously transmit information and configuration for a reference cell.
  • the configuration information for the reference cell can be transmitted together with the message requesting configuration information for L1/L2-based handover.
  • the message may include an instruction requesting that the configuration information for L1/L2-based handover be transmitted to candidate neighboring cells (1f-04, 1f-05) by applying delta configuration.
  • the instruction may be requested for each cell or may be commonly requested for all cells.
  • step 1f-20 the candidate neighboring cells (1f-04, 1f-05) that have received a message requesting configuration information for L1/L2-based handover generate configuration information of each candidate neighboring cell based on delta configuration when L1/L2-based handover is applied based on the configuration information of the transmitted reference cell.
  • each candidate neighboring cell (1f-04, 1f-05) stores the generated L1/L2-based handover configuration information in an L1/L2-based handover configuration information response message (L1/L2 config response message) and transfers it to the base station CU (1f-03).
  • the configuration information for the LTM candidate cells corresponds to cell configuration and cell group configuration (CellGroupConfig). Additionally, in the above step, each LTM candidate cell (1f-04, 1f-05) may reject the delta configuration request from the CU, in which case, it may apply the full configuration and transmit it to the CU (1f-03) including an instruction indicating it.
  • the source cell (1f-02) receives the RRC message generated by the base station CU (1f-03) and transmits it to the terminal (1f-01).
  • the RRC message is a message that contains configuration information (Pre-Config1, ⁇ Pre-ConfigN, 1f-31) for surrounding candidate cells to which L1/L2-based handover is applied, and the configuration information for each LTM candidate cell may be a message generated by including the radio bearer configuration (RadioBearerConfig) and L3 measurement related configuration (MeasConfig) generated by the CU in the cell group configuration (CellGroupConfig) received from the DU.
  • the DU generates the cell group configuration, which is a lower layer configuration, and transfers it to the CU, but the radio bearer and L3 measurement related configurations are generated by the CU. Therefore, the CU finally generates and manages the configuration information for each LTM candidate cell as a container (Pre-Config) and transfers it to the terminal (1f-01) through an RRC message. Accordingly, the configuration information (Pre-Config) for each LTM candidate cell has an index that can designate the LTM candidate cells. The index may be an actual cell index or an index that logically designates the configuration of a newly created LTM candidate cell.
  • step 1f-35 the terminal (1f-01) that receives the RRC message performs a procedure for decoding and processing the RRC message.
  • the processing includes ASN.1 decoding and validity determination of the received message and a method for storing and managing the configuration contents.
  • the base station and each LTM candidate cell perform a procedure for updating the LTM candidate cell configuration information transmitted in the above step, if it has changed.
  • the examples of the present disclosure are characterized by proposing a structure of an LTM candidate cell RRC configuration for effectively updating the LTM candidate cell configuration information in such a case and proposing an overall procedure. That is, among the detailed settings of the LTM candidate cell RRC configuration, at least one of the serving cell and cell group configuration (CellGroupConfig), the radio bearer configuration (RadioBearerConfig), or the layer 3 measurement related configuration (MeasConfig) can be changed.
  • CellGroupConfig serving cell and cell group configuration
  • RadioBearerConfig Radio BearerConfig
  • MeasConfig layer 3 measurement related configuration
  • step 1f-40 if a change in radio bearer configuration (RadioBearerConfig) is required in LTM candidate cell 1, the CU (1f-03) of the base station generates a change in radio bearer configuration (RadioBearerConfig1, 1f-42) for the corresponding cell, includes it in the corresponding LTM candidate cell configuration container (Pre-Config1, 1f-41), and transmits an RRC message to the terminal (1f-01).
  • Pre-Config1 (1f-41) includes updated RadioBearerConfig configuration information (1f-42) and an index indicating the configuration for the LTM candidate cell, and other information (CellGroupConfig, MeasConfig) of the LTM candidate cell configuration information may be omitted.
  • the RadioBearerConfig may have a delta configuration applied.
  • step 1f-45 if a change in L3 measurement-related configuration (MeasConfig) is required in LTM candidate cell 1, the CU (1f-03) of the base station generates a change in L3 measurement-related configuration (MeasConfig1, 1f-47) for the corresponding cell, includes it in the corresponding LTM candidate cell configuration container (Pre-Config1, 1f-46), and transmits it to the terminal through an RRC message.
  • MeasConfig L3 measurement-related configuration
  • Pre-Config1 (1f-46) includes information on the L3 measurement-related configuration (MeasConfig1, 1f-47) to be updated and an index indicating the configuration for the LTM candidate cell, and other information (CellGroupConfig, RadioBearerConfig) of the LTM candidate cell configuration information may be omitted.
  • the MeasConfig may have a delta configuration applied.
  • LTM candidate cell 1 transmits a message requesting a configuration change for CellGroupConfig1 to the CU (1f-03) of the base station through the F1 interface.
  • the CU (1f-03) of the base station applies CellGroupConfig1 (1f-57) transmitted from LTM candidate cell 1 (DU 2, 1f-04), includes it in the corresponding LTM candidate cell configuration container (Pre-Config1, 1f-56), and transmits an RRC message to the terminal.
  • Pre-Config1 (1f-56) includes updated CellGroupConfig1 configuration information and an index indicating configuration for the LTM candidate cell, and other information (RadioBearerConfig, MeasConfig) of the LTM candidate cell configuration information may be omitted.
  • delta configuration may be applied to the CellGroupConfig1.
  • step 1f-60 the terminal (1f-01) performs L1 measurement and reporting for each candidate surrounding cell, and the source cell that receives the measurement and reports makes a handover decision and instructs the terminal (1f-01) to perform L1/L2 handover in step 1f-65.
  • MAC CE and DCI can be used as L1/L2 signaling including a handover indicator.
  • the source cell (DU, 1f-02) or the source base station (CU, 1f-03) can receive the L1 measurement values for determining the L1/L2 handover in steps 1f-60 and 1f-65 and determine the handover.
  • the source cell (DU, 1f-02) transfers the L1 measurement value received from the terminal (1f-01) to the base station (CU, 1f-03) and transfers L1/L2 signaling to the terminal (1f-01) according to the handover decision instruction of the base station (CU, 1f-03).
  • the source cell (DU, 1f-02) makes the final decision, it does not transfer the L1 measurement value to the base station (CU, 1f-03), but decides the handover on its own according to the measurement value criteria (threshold value and measurement value range) for making the handover decision for each candidate neighboring cell received from the previous base station, and transfers L1/L2 signaling to the terminal (1f-01) accordingly.
  • the terminal (1f-01) When the L1/L2 handover instruction is transmitted to the terminal, the terminal (1f-01) starts a handover procedure in step 1f-70 and starts a timer for L1/L2 handover.
  • the timer may be a newly set timer for LTM, or may reuse a T304 timer used for an existing handover.
  • the terminal (1f-01) applies a setting for a target cell to which L1/L2 handover is applied. This is one of the neighboring cell settings received in advance in steps 1f-30/1f-40/1f-45/1f-55.
  • the terminal (1f-01) performs random access when random access is required for the target cell, and skips the random access procedure when random access is not indicated or required (when uplink synchronization has already been performed or aligned).
  • the terminal (1f-01) performs a handover completion procedure with the target cell.
  • the procedure may vary depending on the method of indicating the handover completion, and may be a process of transmitting an RRCReconfiugrationComplete message if the target cell configuration is received at the RRC message level, but if the cell level or cell group level configuration is received, a new handover completion indication message (new RRC message or MAC CE) may replace the procedure.
  • the target cell (DU2, 1f-04) informs the base station (CU, 1f-03) that the LTM procedure is completed and the terminal (1f-01) has successfully performed RRC connection to the corresponding cell. Thereafter, the base station (CU, 1f-03) instructs the source cell (1f-02) to terminate the connection to the terminal (1f-01) and to release the UE context.
  • configuration-related operations may be updated with F1 interface messages between the base station CU and neighboring cells.
  • the LTM candidate cell configuration procedure described above is repeated to perform the reference cell configuration change and LTM candidate cell configuration change procedures, and the changed configuration information is transmitted to the terminal.
  • new MAC CE and DCI may be introduced to dynamically indicate neighboring candidate cells to which L1/L2-based handover is applied, so that dynamically valid configurations may be indicated or released (previously transmitted L1/L2-based handover configurations may be released).
  • the above-described related operations may be performed internally by the base station without transmitting separate signaling to the terminal.
  • FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a second LTM candidate cell RRC configuration method and procedure for providing effective RRC configuration update for configuration of surrounding cells for L1/L2 based handover in an intra-CU scenario, as Example 2 applied to the present disclosure.
  • the terminal (1g-01) in the RRC connection state performs data transmission and reception with the source cell 1 (DU 1, 1g-02), and transmits the measurement values for the serving cell and surrounding cells to the source cell 1 (DU 1, 1g-02) according to the layer 3 measurement and reporting set in step 1g-10.
  • the actual measurement values are transmitted to the CU (1g-03) of the base station. This is because the base station CU (1g-03) is responsible for RRC message processing and determines mobility.
  • the base station CU (1g-03) generates a message (L1/L2 config request message) requesting configuration information for L1/L2-based handover at step 1g-15 to surrounding cells (DU 2, 1g-04; DU M, 1g-05) based on the measurement value report transmitted from the terminal (1g-01) and transmits the message to the F1 interface.
  • the candidate cell is shown in connection with the DU, but in reality, the candidate cell and the DU may be mapped 1:1 or multiple candidate cells may be included in one DU.
  • the message requesting configuration information for the above L1/L2-based handover may be an existing handover request message, a UE context request message, a UE context modification request message, etc., or a new F1 or Xn message.
  • the message requesting the configuration information for the L1/L2-based handover requests neighboring cells to be determined as candidate cells for the L1/L2-based handover, and at the same time requests RRC configuration information to be applied when the L1/L2-based handover is performed to the corresponding cell.
  • the RRC configuration information to be applied when the L1/L2-based handover is performed may have one of the structures of a cell level, a cell group level, and an RRC message level.
  • the message requesting the configuration information for the L1/L2-based handover may simultaneously transmit information and configuration for a reference cell.
  • the configuration information for the reference cell may be transmitted together with the message requesting the configuration information for the L1/L2-based handover.
  • the message may include an instruction to transmit the configuration information for the L1/L2-based handover to the candidate neighboring cells (1g-04, 1g-05) by applying a delta configuration.
  • the instruction may be requested for each cell or may be commonly requested for all cells.
  • step 1g-20 the candidate neighboring cells (1g-04, 1g-05) that have received a message requesting configuration information for L1/L2-based handover generate configuration information of each candidate neighboring cell based on delta configuration when L1/L2-based handover is applied based on the configuration information of the transmitted reference cell.
  • each candidate neighboring cell (1g-04, 1g-05) stores the generated L1/L2-based handover configuration information in an L1/L2-based handover configuration information response message (L1/L2 config response message) and transfers it to the base station CU (1g-03).
  • the configuration information for the LTM candidate cells corresponds to cell configuration and cell group configuration (CellGroupConfig). Additionally, in the above step, each LTM candidate cell (1g-04, 1g-05) may reject a delta configuration request from the CU, in which case, it may apply the full configuration and transmit it to the CU along with an instruction indicating the same.
  • the source cell (1g-02) receives an RRC message generated by the base station CU (1g-03) and transmits it to the terminal (1g-01).
  • the RRC message is configuration information for surrounding candidate cells to which L1/L2-based handover is applied, and may be a message generated by including a list (List of CellGroupConfig, 1g-31) containing cell group configurations (CellGroupConfig) received from each candidate cell (DU), a list (List of RadioBearerConfig, 1g-32) of radio bearer configurations (RadioBearerConfig) generated by the CU applied to the candidate cells, and a list (List of MeasConfig, 1g-33) of L3 measurement-related configurations (MeasConfig) generated by the CU applied to the candidate cells.
  • the DU creates the cell group configuration, which is a lower layer configuration, and transfers it to the CU, the radio bearer and L3 measurement-related configurations are created in the CU. Therefore, when creating and managing configuration information for each LTM candidate cell, it may be more efficient for the CU to ultimately manage each piece of information separately. Accordingly, in the configuration information list (1g-31, 1g-32, 1g-33) for each LTM candidate cell, there is an index that can designate the LTM candidate cells. The index may be an actual cell index or an index that logically designates the configuration of a newly created LTM candidate cell.
  • the terminal (1g-01) that receives the RRC message performs a procedure for decoding and processing the RRC message.
  • the processing includes ASN.1 decoding and validity determination of the received message, and a method for storing and managing configuration contents.
  • a list including cell group configurations (CellGroupConfig) for LTM candidate cells includes an index that can designate LTM candidate cells.
  • the list of radio bearer configurations (RadioBearerConfig) and the list of L3 measurement related configurations (MeasConfig) can include candidate cell indication index or bitmap information that can designate which LTM candidate cells each configuration in the list is applied to. This has an advantage of reducing signaling overhead compared to the structure in Example 1 because the radio bearer configuration and L3 measurement related configuration generated by the CU can be applied to a plurality of LTM candidate cells.
  • the base station and each LTM candidate cell perform a procedure for updating the LTM candidate cell configuration information transmitted in the above step, if it has changed.
  • a structure of an LTM candidate cell RRC configuration for effectively updating the LTM candidate cell configuration information is proposed, and the overall procedure is proposed. That is, among the detailed settings of the LTM candidate cell RRC configuration, at least one of the serving cell and cell group configuration (CellGroupConfig), the radio bearer configuration (RadioBearerConfig), or the layer 3 measurement related configuration (MeasConfig) may be changed.
  • step 1g-40 if a change in radio bearer configuration (RadioBearerConfig) is required in LTM candidate cell 1, the CU (1g-03) of the base station generates a change in radio bearer configuration (RadioBearerConfig1, 1g-41) for the corresponding cell, includes it in the candidate LTM configuration information, and transmits it to the terminal via an RRC message.
  • the RadioBearerConfig1 configuration information (1g-41) includes an index indicating which LTM candidate cell the corresponding configuration information indicates the configuration for.
  • the RadioBearerConfig can have a delta configuration applied.
  • a change in one RadioBearerConfig1 is described as an example, but a list including multiple RadioBearerConfigs can be generated and transmitted to the terminal in the corresponding step.
  • step 1g-45 if a change in L3 measurement-related settings (MeasConfig) is required in LTM candidate cell 1, the CU (1g-03) of the base station generates a change in L3 measurement-related settings (MeasConfig1, 1g-46) for the corresponding cell, includes it in the LTM configuration information, and transmits it to the terminal (1g-01) via an RRC message.
  • the MeasConfig1 configuration information (1g-46) includes an index indicating which LTM candidate cell the corresponding configuration information indicates the configuration for.
  • the MeasConfig can have delta configuration applied. As an example, a single MeasConfig1 change is described as an example, but a list including multiple MeasConfigs can be generated and transmitted to the terminal in the corresponding step.
  • the LTM candidate cell 1 (1g-04) transmits a message requesting a configuration change for CellGroupConfig1 to the CU (1g-03) of the base station through the F1 interface.
  • the CU (1g-03) of the base station transmits the LTM candidate cell configuration including CellGroupConfig1 (1g-56) transmitted from LTM candidate cell 1 (DU 2, 1g-04) to the terminal (1g-01) through an RRC message.
  • the CellGroupConfig1 configuration information (1g-56) includes an index indicating which LTM candidate cell the configuration information indicates.
  • the CellGroupConfig can be applied with delta configuration. As an example, a single CellGroupConfig1 change is described, but a list including multiple CellGroupConfigs can be generated and transmitted to the terminal (1g-01) at the corresponding step.
  • step 1g-60 the terminal (1g-01) performs L1 measurement and report for each candidate surrounding cell, and the source cell that receives the report makes a handover decision and instructs the terminal (1g-01) to perform L1/L2 handover in step 1g-65.
  • MAC CE and DCI can be used as L1/L2 signaling including a handover indicator.
  • the source cell (DU, 1g-02) or the source base station (CU, 1g-03) can receive the L1 measurement values for determining the L1/L2 handover in steps 1g-60 and 1g-65 and determine the handover.
  • the source cell (DU, 1g-02) transmits the L1 measurement values received from the terminal (1g-01) and transmits L1/L2 signaling to the terminal (1g-01) according to the handover decision instruction of the base station (CU, 1g-03).
  • the source cell (DU, 1g-02) makes the final decision, it does not transmit the L1 measurement values to the base station, but decides the handover on its own according to the measurement value criteria (threshold value and measurement value range) for making the handover decision for each candidate neighboring cell received from the previous base station, and transmits L1/L2 signaling to the terminal (1g-01) accordingly.
  • the terminal (1g-01) When the L1/L2 handover instruction is transmitted to the terminal (1g-01), the terminal (1g-01) starts a handover procedure in step 1g-70 and starts a timer for L1/L2 handover.
  • the timer may be a newly set timer for LTM, or may reuse a T304 timer used for an existing handover.
  • the terminal (1g-01) applies a setting for a target cell to which the L1/L2 handover is applied. This is one of the neighboring cell settings previously received in steps 1g-30/1g-40/1g-45/1g-55.
  • the terminal (1g-01) performs a random access for the corresponding target cell if random access is required, and skips the random access procedure if random access is not indicated or is not required (if uplink synchronization has already been performed or aligned).
  • the terminal (1g-01) performs a handover completion procedure with the target cell.
  • the procedure may vary depending on the method of indicating the handover completion, and may be a process of transmitting an RRCReconfiugrationComplete message if the target cell configuration is received at the RRC message level, but if the cell level or cell group level configuration is received, a new handover completion indication message (new RRC message or MAC CE) may replace the procedure.
  • the target cell (DU2, 1g-04) informs the base station (CU, 1g-03) that the LTM procedure is completed and the terminal (1g-01) has successfully performed RRC connection to the cell. Thereafter, the base station (CU, 1g-03) instructs the source cell (1g-02) to terminate the connection to the terminal (1g-01) and to release the UE context.
  • configuration-related operations may be updated with F1 interface messages between the base station CU and neighboring cells.
  • the LTM candidate cell configuration procedure described above is repeated to perform the reference cell configuration change and LTM candidate cell configuration change procedures, and the changed configuration information is transmitted to the terminal.
  • new MAC CE and DCI may be introduced to dynamically indicate neighboring candidate cells to which L1/L2-based handover is applied, so that dynamically valid configurations may be indicated or released (previously transmitted L1/L2-based handover configurations may be released).
  • the above-described related operations may be performed internally by the base station without transmitting separate signaling to the terminal.
  • FIG. 8 is a diagram illustrating a first LTM candidate cell RRC configuration method and procedure for providing effective RRC configuration update for configuration of neighboring cells for L1/L2 based handover in an inter-CU scenario, as an example 3 applied to the present disclosure.
  • the terminal (1h-01) in the RRC connection state performs data transmission and reception with the source cell 1 (DU 1, 1h-02), and transmits the measurement values for the serving cell and surrounding cells to the source cell 1 (DU 1, 1h-02) according to the layer 3 measurement and reporting set in step 1h-10.
  • the actual measurement values are transmitted to the CU1 (1h-03) of the base station. This is because the base station CU1 (1h-03) is responsible for RRC message processing and determines mobility.
  • base station CU1 (1h-03) generates a message (L1/L2 config request message) requesting configuration information for L1/L2-based handover to neighboring cells (DU 2 - CU 2, 1h-04; DU M, 1h-05) based on the measurement value report transmitted from terminal (1h-01), and transmits the message to base station CU2 (1h-06) through Xn interface, and base station CU2 (1h-06) transmits the message to each neighboring cell (DU 2 - CU 2, 1h-04; DU M, 1h-05) through F1 interface.
  • a message L1/L2 config request message
  • candidate cells are shown in connection with DUs, but in reality, candidate cells and DUs may be mapped 1:1, or multiple candidate cells may be included in one DU.
  • the message requesting the configuration information for the above L1/L2-based handover may be an existing handover request message, a UE context request message, a UE context modification request message, etc., or may be a new F1 or Xn message.
  • the message requesting the configuration information for the L1/L2-based handover requests neighboring cells to be determined as candidate cells for the L1/L2-based handover, and at the same time requests RRC configuration information to be applied when the L1/L2-based handover is performed to the corresponding cell.
  • the RRC configuration information applied when the L1/L2-based handover is performed may have one of the structures of a cell level, a cell group level, and an RRC message level.
  • the message requesting the configuration information for the above L1/L2-based handover may simultaneously transmit information and configuration for a reference cell.
  • the configuration information for the corresponding reference cell may be transmitted together through the message requesting the configuration information for the L1/L2-based handover.
  • the message may include an instruction to transfer the setup information for L1/L2-based handover to candidate neighboring cells (1h-04, 1h-05) by applying delta configuration. The instruction may be requested for each cell or may be requested commonly to all cells. In Example 3, a case where candidate neighboring cells (1h-04, 1h-05) exist in different DUs within inter CU is described as an example.
  • the candidate neighboring cells (1h-04, 1h-05) that have received a message requesting configuration information for L1/L2-based handover generate configuration information of each candidate neighboring cell based on delta configuration when L1/L2-based handover is applied based on the configuration information of the transmitted reference cell.
  • each candidate neighboring cell (1h-04, 1h-05) stores the generated L1/L2-based handover configuration information in an L1/L2-based handover configuration information response message (L1/L2 config response message) and transfers it to base station CU 2 (1h-06).
  • Base station CU 2 (1h-06) transfers the LTM configuration response message received from the neighboring cells (DU 2 - CU 2, 1h-04; DU M, 1h-05) to source base station CU1 (1h-03).
  • the configuration information for the LTM candidate cells corresponds to the cell configuration and cell group configuration (CellGroupConfig).
  • CellGroupConfig cell group configuration
  • each LTM candidate cell (1h-04, 1h-05) may reject the delta configuration request from the CU (1h-02), in which case, the full configuration may be applied and transmitted to the CU (1h-03) including an instruction indicating this.
  • the source cell (1h-02) receives the RRC message generated by the base station CU (1h-03) and transmits it to the terminal (1h-01).
  • the RRC message is a message that contains configuration information (Pre-Config1, ⁇ , Pre-ConfigN, 1h-31) for surrounding candidate cells to which L1/L2-based handover is applied, and the configuration information for each LTM candidate cell may be a message generated by including the cell group configuration (CellGroupConfig) received from each candidate cell (radio bearer configuration (RadioBearerConfig) and L3 measurement-related configuration (MeasConfig) generated by the CU).
  • CellGroupConfig cell group configuration
  • RadioBearerConfig radio bearer configuration
  • MeasConfig L3 measurement-related configuration
  • the configuration information for each LTM candidate cell is finally generated and managed as a container (Pre-Config) by the CU (1h-03) and transferred to the terminal (1h-01) through an RRC message.
  • the configuration information (Pre-Config) for each LTM candidate cell has an index that can refer to the LTM candidate cells.
  • the index may be an actual cell index or a logical index of a newly generated LTM candidate cell. It may be an index referring to a setting.
  • the terminal (1h-01) that receives the RRC message in step 1h-35 performs a procedure for decoding and processing the RRC message.
  • the processing includes ASN.1 decoding and validity determination of the received message and a method for storing and managing the configuration contents.
  • the base station and each LTM candidate cell perform a procedure for updating the LTM candidate cell configuration information transmitted in the above step, if it has changed.
  • a structure of an LTM candidate cell RRC configuration for effectively updating the LTM candidate cell configuration information is proposed, and the overall procedure is proposed. That is, among the detailed settings of the LTM candidate cell RRC configuration, at least one of the serving cell and cell group configuration (CellGroupConfig), the radio bearer configuration (RadioBearerConfig), or the layer 3 measurement related configuration (MeasConfig) may be changed.
  • step 1h-40 if a change in radio bearer configuration (RadioBearerConfig) is required in LTM candidate cell 1, CU2 (1h-06) of the base station generates a change in radio bearer configuration (RadioBearerConfig1, 1h-40) for the corresponding cell and transmits it to CU1 (1h-03) of the source base station.
  • RadioBearerConfig a change in radio bearer configuration
  • RadioBearerConfig1, 1h-40 for the corresponding cell and transmits it to CU1 (1h-03) of the source base station.
  • CU1 (1h-03) of the source base station includes the received radio bearer configuration change contents in the corresponding LTM candidate cell configuration container (Pre-Config1, 1h-46) and transmits it to the terminal through an RRC message.
  • Pre-Config1 (1h-46) includes updated RadioBearerConfig configuration information (1h-47) and an index indicating the configuration for the LTM candidate cell, and other information (CellGroupConfig, MeasConfig) of the LTM candidate cell configuration information may be omitted.
  • delta configuration may be applied to the RadioBearerConfig.
  • step 1h-50 if a change in L3 measurement-related configuration (MeasConfig) is required in LTM candidate cell 1, CU2 (1h-06) of the base station generates a change in L3 measurement-related configuration (MeasConfig1, 1h-50) for the corresponding cell and transmits it to CU1 (1h-03) of the source base station.
  • CU1 (1h-03) of the source base station includes the information received from LTM candidate cell 1 in the corresponding LTM candidate cell configuration container (Pre-Config1, 1h-56) and transmits it to the terminal (1h-01) through an RRC message.
  • Pre-Config1 (1h-56) includes updated L3 measurement-related configuration (MeasConfig1, 1h-57) information and an index indicating the configuration for the LTM candidate cell, and other information (CellGroupConfig, RadioBearerConfig) of the LTM candidate cell configuration information may be omitted. Additionally, the above MeasConfig can apply delta configuration.
  • LTM candidate cell 1 transmits a message requesting a configuration change for CellGroupConfig1 to CU2 (1h-06) of the base station through the F1 interface.
  • CU2 (1h-06) of the base station applies CellGroupConfig1 (1h-67) transmitted from LTM candidate cell 1 (DU 2, 1h-04), includes it in the corresponding LTM candidate cell configuration container (Pre-Config1, 1h-66), and transmits it to the terminal through an RRC message.
  • Pre-Config1 (1h-66) includes updated CellGroupConfig1 configuration information and an index indicating configuration for the LTM candidate cell, and other information (RadioBearerConfig, MeasConfig) of the LTM candidate cell configuration information may be omitted.
  • delta configuration may be applied to the CellGroupConfig1.
  • step 1h-70 the terminal (1h-01) performs L1 measurement and reporting for each candidate surrounding cell, and if the source cell receiving the measurement determines a handover, it instructs the terminal (1h-01) to perform L1/L2 handover in step 1h-65.
  • MAC CE and DCI can be used as L1/L2 signaling including a handover indicator.
  • the source cell (DU, 1h-02) or the source base station (CU, 1h-03) can receive the L1 measurement values for determining the L1/L2 handover in steps 1h-70 and 1h-75 and determine the handover.
  • the source cell (DU, 1h-02) transmits the L1 measurement values received from the terminal (1h-01) and transmits L1/L2 signaling to the terminal (1h-01) according to the handover decision instruction of the base station (CU, 1h-03).
  • the source cell (DU, 1h-02) makes the final decision, it does not transmit the L1 measurement values to the base station, but decides the handover on its own according to the measurement value criteria (threshold value and measurement value range) for making the handover decision for each candidate neighboring cell received from the previous base station, and transmits L1/L2 signaling to the terminal accordingly.
  • the terminal When the L1/L2 handover instruction is transmitted to the terminal (1h-01), the terminal starts the handover procedure in step 1h-80 and starts a timer for L1/L2 handover.
  • the timer may be a newly set timer for LTM, or may reuse a T304 timer used for an existing handover.
  • the terminal (1h-01) applies a setting for a target cell to which L1/L2 handover is applied. This is one of the neighboring cell settings received in advance in steps 1h-30/1h-45/1h-55/1h-65.
  • the terminal (1h-01) performs random access if random access is required for the target cell, and skips the random access procedure if random access is not indicated or required (uplink synchronization has already been performed or aligned).
  • the terminal (1h-01) performs a handover completion procedure with the target cell.
  • the procedure may vary depending on the method of indicating the handover completion, and may be a process of transmitting an RRCReconfiugrationComplete message if the target cell configuration is received at the RRC message level, but if the cell level or cell group level configuration is received, a new handover completion indication message (new RRC message or MAC CE) may replace the procedure.
  • the target cell (DU2, 1h-04) informs the base station (CU, 1h-03) that the LTM procedure is completed and the terminal (1h-01) has successfully performed RRC connection to the corresponding cell. Thereafter, the base station (CU, 1h-03) instructs the source cell (1h-02) to terminate the connection to the corresponding terminal and to release the UE context.
  • configuration-related operations may be updated by messages in the F1 interface between the base station CU and neighboring cells and in the Xn interface between the base station CU1 and base station CU2.
  • the LTM candidate cell configuration procedure described above is repeated to perform the reference cell configuration change and LTM candidate cell configuration change procedures, and the changed configuration information is transmitted to the terminal.
  • new MAC CE and DCI may be introduced to dynamically indicate neighboring candidate cells to which L1/L2-based handover is applied, so that dynamically valid configurations may be indicated or released (previously transmitted L1/L2-based handover configurations may be released).
  • the above-described related operations may be performed internally by the base station without transmitting separate signaling to the terminal.
  • FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating a second LTM candidate cell RRC configuration method and procedure for providing effective RRC configuration update for configuration of neighboring cells for L1/L2 based handover in an inter-CU scenario, as Example 4 applied to the present disclosure.
  • the terminal (1i-01) in the RRC connection state performs data transmission and reception with the source cell 1 (DU 1, 1i-02), and transmits the measurement values for the serving cell and surrounding cells to the source cell 1 (DU 1, 1i-02) according to the layer 3 measurement and reporting set in step 1i-10.
  • the actual measurement values are transmitted to the CU (1i-03) of the base station. This is because the base station CU (1i-03) is responsible for RRC message processing and determines mobility.
  • the base station CU (1i-03) generates a message (L1/L2 config request message) requesting configuration information for L1/L2-based handover at step 1i-15 to neighboring cells (DU 2, 1i-04; DU M, 1i-05) based on the measurement value report transmitted from the terminal and transmits it to the base station CU2 (1i-06) through the Xn interface.
  • the base station CU2 (1i-06) then transmits it to each neighboring cell (DU 2 - CU 2, 1i-04; DU M, 1i-05) through the F1 interface.
  • the candidate cell is shown in connection with the DU, but in reality, the candidate cell and the DU may be mapped 1:1 or multiple candidate cells may be included in one DU.
  • the message requesting configuration information for the above L1/L2-based handover may be an existing handover request message, a UE context request message, a UE context modification request message, etc., or may be a new F1 or Xn message.
  • the message requesting the configuration information for the L1/L2-based handover requests neighboring cells to be determined as candidate cells for the L1/L2-based handover, and at the same time requests RRC configuration information to be applied when the L1/L2-based handover is performed to the corresponding cell.
  • the RRC configuration information to be applied when the L1/L2-based handover is performed may have one of the structures of a cell level, a cell group level, and an RRC message level.
  • the message requesting the configuration information for the L1/L2-based handover may simultaneously transmit information and configuration for a reference cell.
  • the configuration information for the reference cell may be transmitted together with the message requesting the configuration information for the L1/L2-based handover.
  • the message may include an instruction to transmit the configuration information for the L1/L2-based handover to the candidate neighboring cells (1i-04, 1i-05) by applying a delta configuration. The instruction may be requested for each cell or may be commonly requested for all cells.
  • the candidate neighboring cells (1i-04, 1i-05) that have received a message requesting configuration information for L1/L2-based handover generate configuration information of each candidate neighboring cell based on delta configuration when L1/L2-based handover is applied based on the configuration information of the transmitted reference cell.
  • each candidate neighboring cell (1i-04, 1i-05) stores the generated L1/L2-based handover configuration information in an L1/L2-based handover configuration information response message (L1/L2 config response message) and transfers it to base station CU 2 (1i-06).
  • Base station CU 2 (1i-06) transfers the LTM configuration response message received from the neighboring cells (DU 2 - CU 2, 1i-04; DU M, 1i-05) to source base station CU 1 (1i-03).
  • the configuration information for the LTM candidate cells corresponds to the cell configuration and cell group configuration (CellGroupConfig).
  • CellGroupConfig the cell configuration and cell group configuration
  • each LTM candidate cell (1i-04, 1i-05) may reject the delta configuration request from the CU, and in this case, may apply the full configuration and transmit it to the CU (1i-03) including an instruction indicating this.
  • the source cell (1i-02) receives the RRC message generated by the base station CU (1i-03) and transfers it to the terminal (1i-01).
  • the RRC message is configuration information for surrounding candidate cells to which L1/L2-based handover is applied, and may be a message generated by including a list (List of CellGroupConfig, 1i-31) containing cell group configurations (CellGroupConfig) received from each candidate cell (DU), a list (List of RadioBearerConfig, 1i-32) of radio bearer configurations (RadioBearerConfig) generated by the CU applied to the candidate cells, and a list (List of MeasConfig, 1i-33) of L3 measurement-related configurations (MeasConfig) generated by the CU applied to the candidate cells.
  • the DU creates the cell group configuration, which is a lower layer configuration, and transfers it to the CU
  • the radio bearer and L3 measurement-related configurations are created in the CU, so when creating and managing configuration information for each LTM candidate cell, it may be more efficient for the CU to separately manage each piece of information.
  • the configuration information list (1i-31, 1i-32, 1i-33) for each LTM candidate cell there is an index that can designate the LTM candidate cells.
  • the index may be an actual cell index or an index that logically designates the configuration of a newly created LTM candidate cell.
  • the terminal (1i-01) that receives the RRC message performs a procedure for decoding and processing the RRC message.
  • the processing includes ASN.1 decoding and validity determination of the received message, and a method for storing and managing configuration contents.
  • a list including cell group configurations (CellGroupConfig) for LTM candidate cells includes an index that can designate LTM candidate cells.
  • the list of radio bearer configurations (RadioBearerConfig) and the list of L3 measurement related configurations (MeasConfig) can include candidate cell indication index or bitmap information that can designate which LTM candidate cells each configuration in the list is applied to. This has an advantage of reducing signaling overhead compared to the structure in Example 1 because the radio bearer configuration and L3 measurement related configuration generated by the CU can be applied to a plurality of LTM candidate cells.
  • the base station and each LTM candidate cell perform a procedure for updating the LTM candidate cell configuration information transmitted in the above step, if it has changed.
  • a structure of an LTM candidate cell RRC configuration for effectively updating the LTM candidate cell configuration information is proposed, and the overall procedure is proposed. That is, among the detailed settings of the LTM candidate cell RRC configuration, at least one of the serving cell and cell group configuration (CellGroupConfig), the radio bearer configuration (RadioBearerConfig), or the layer 3 measurement related configuration (MeasConfig) may be changed.
  • step 1i-40 if a change in radio bearer configuration (RadioBearerConfig) is required in LTM candidate cell 1, CU2 (1i-06) of the base station generates a radio bearer configuration change for the corresponding cell (RadioBearerConfig1, 1i-40) and transmits it to CU1 (1i-03) of the source base station.
  • the change in configuration transmitted to CU1 (1i-03) of the source base station is included in the candidate LTM configuration information in step 1i-45 and transmitted to the terminal through an RRC message.
  • the RadioBearerConfig1 configuration information (1i-46) includes an index indicating which LTM candidate cell the corresponding configuration information indicates the configuration for.
  • delta configuration can be applied to the RadioBearerConfig.
  • a change in one RadioBearerConfig1 is described, but a list including multiple RadioBearerConfigs can be generated and transmitted to the terminal (1i-01) in the corresponding step.
  • step 1i-45 if a change in L3 measurement-related settings (MeasConfig) is required in LTM candidate cell 1, CU2 (1i-06) of the base station generates a radio bearer setting change for the corresponding cell (MeasConfig1, 1i-50) and transmits it to CU1 (1i-03) of the source base station.
  • the setting change transmitted to CU1 (1i-03) of the source base station is included in the candidate LTM setting information in step 1i-55 and transmitted to the terminal (1i-01) via an RRC message.
  • the MeasConfig1 setting information (1i-56) includes an index indicating which LTM candidate cell the setting information indicates.
  • delta configuration can be applied to the MeasConfig.
  • a single MeasConfig1 change is exemplified, but a list including multiple MeasConfigs can be generated and transmitted to the terminal (1i-01) in the corresponding step.
  • LTM candidate cell 1 transmits a message requesting a configuration change for CellGroupConfig1 to CU2 (1i-06) of the base station through the F1 interface.
  • CU2 (1i-06) of the base station applies CellGroupConfig1 (1i-66) transmitted from LTM candidate cell 1 (DU 2, 1i-04) and transmits it to CU1 (1i-03) of the base station.
  • an LTM candidate cell configuration including CellGroupConfig1 (1i-66) transmitted from LTM candidate cell 1 (DU 2, 1i-04) is transmitted to the terminal (1i-01) via an RRC message.
  • the CellGroupConfig1 configuration information (1i-66) includes an index indicating which LTM candidate cell the corresponding configuration information indicates configuration for.
  • the CellGroupConfig can have a delta configuration applied.
  • a single CellGroupConfig1 change is described as an example, but a list including multiple CellGroupConfigs may be generated and transmitted to the terminal (1i-01) in the corresponding step.
  • step 1i-70 the terminal (1i-01) performs L1 measurement and reporting for each candidate surrounding cell, and if the source cell that receives the measurement and reports decides to perform a handover, it instructs the terminal (1i-01) to perform an L1/L2 handover in step 1i-75.
  • MAC CE and DCI can be used as L1/L2 signaling including a handover indicator.
  • the source cell (DU, 1i-02) or the source base station (CU, 1i-03) can receive the L1 measurement values for determining the L1/L2 handover in steps 1i-70 and 1i-75 and determine the handover.
  • the source cell (DU, 1i-02) transfers the L1 measurement values received from the terminal and transfers L1/L2 signaling to the terminal according to the handover decision instruction of the base station (CU, 1i-03).
  • the source cell (DU, 1i-02) makes the final decision, it does not transmit the L1 measurement value to the base station, but rather decides the handover on its own based on the measurement value criteria (threshold value and measurement value range) for making the handover decision for each candidate neighboring cell received from the previous base station, and transmits L1/L2 signaling to the terminal accordingly.
  • the terminal (1i-01) When the L1/L2 handover instruction is transmitted to the terminal, the terminal (1i-01) starts a handover procedure in step 1i-80 and starts a timer for L1/L2 handover.
  • the timer may be a newly set timer for LTM, or may reuse a T304 timer used for an existing handover.
  • the terminal (1i-01) applies a setting for a target cell to which L1/L2 handover is applied. This is one of the neighboring cell settings received in advance in steps 1i-30/1i-45/1i-55/1i-65.
  • the terminal (1i-01) performs random access when random access is required for the target cell, and skips the random access procedure when random access is not indicated or required (when uplink synchronization has already been performed or aligned).
  • the terminal (1i-01) performs a handover completion procedure with the target cell.
  • the procedure may vary depending on the method of indicating the handover completion, and may be a process of transmitting an RRCReconfiugrationComplete message if the target cell configuration is received at the RRC message level, but if the cell level or cell group level configuration is received, a new handover completion indication message (new RRC message or MAC CE) may replace the procedure.
  • the target cell (DU2, 1i-04) informs the base station (CU, 1i-03) that the LTM procedure is completed and the terminal (1i-01) has successfully performed RRC connection to the corresponding cell. Thereafter, the base station (CU, 1i-03) instructs the source cell (1i-02) to terminate the connection to the corresponding terminal and instructs it to release the UE context.
  • configuration-related operations may be updated with messages in the F1 interface between the base station CU and neighboring cells and in the Xn interface between the base station CU1 and base station CU 2.
  • the LTM candidate cell configuration procedure described above is repeated to perform the reference cell configuration change and LTM candidate cell configuration change procedures, and the changed configuration information is transmitted to the terminal.
  • new MAC CE and DCI may be introduced to dynamically indicate neighboring candidate cells to which L1/L2-based handover is applied, so that dynamically valid configurations may be indicated or released (previously transmitted L1/L2-based handover configurations may be released).
  • the related operations may be performed internally by the base station without transmitting separate signaling to the terminal.
  • a reference setting is provided for the following settings existing in CellGroupConfig, and a reference index is indicated for LTM candidate cells and serving cells to which the same setting is applied, so that the same setting can be applied.
  • the terminal applies the settings in the CellGroupConfig IE indicated by the reference configuration index. See the simple pseudo code below.
  • RLC bearer config LCH config
  • MAC config present
  • RLC bearer config LCH config, MAC config are absent
  • cells existing in CellGroupConfig ID B apply the RLC bearer config, LCH config, and MAC config settings existing in CellGroupConfig ID A because reference ID A was indicated.
  • FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating the overall terminal operation for performing L1/L2-based beam change and handover, which is applied to examples of the present disclosure.
  • the present disclosure features an operation when the terminal receives configuration information from a neighboring cell as a delta configuration after L1/L2-based movement is instructed through RRC configuration.
  • a terminal in a connected state can receive configuration information in a neighboring cell that is applied after L1/L2-based movement is instructed through an RRC reconfiguration message from a serving cell.
  • configuration information in a neighboring cell that is applied after L1/L2-based movement is instructed received in step 1j-05 is characterized in that a delta configuration is applied and transmitted based on the configuration for one reference cell.
  • the terminal can know what the reference cell and the configuration information for the reference cell are, which are known in advance or indicated in the RRC configuration, and since only the parts that are different (independent) from the reference cell are set for the settings for neighboring cells other than the reference cell, the signaling overhead is small.
  • the terminal can decode the settings for the received neighboring cells based on the configuration of the reference cell at that stage, and store and manage the actually applied settings (i.e., the operation of saving the delta configured settings based on the reference cell as the full configuration by referring to the reference cell configuration) in a separate buffer and list.
  • the terminal can store and manage the received RRC settings as they are in the buffer without decoding the received settings based on the reference cell and storing and managing the actually applied settings.
  • the advantage of decoding the settings for the neighboring cells based on the reference cell at that stage and storing the actually applied settings is that when an actual L1/L2-based handover is indicated, the handover for the corresponding cell can be applied immediately, so there is no additional delay time.
  • the terminal may receive an RRC message including a change in RRC configuration information for specific LTM candidate cells from the base station in step 1j-10.
  • the RRC message may include a configuration update including at least one of a cell group configuration, a radio bearer configuration, and an L3 measurement-related configuration that are applied to each LTM candidate cell.
  • the terminal Upon receiving the message, the terminal updates the configuration for the LTM candidate cells by applying the corresponding configuration based on the delta configuration.
  • the terminal performs L1 measurement related to a candidate neighboring cell while maintaining a connection state with the serving cell in step 1j-15, and reports the measurement result to the serving cell according to a preset L1 measurement reporting setting method.
  • the serving cell can determine whether to change the beam of the terminal and perform a handover based on the received measurement result, and if it is determined that a change from a specific beam of the serving cell to a specific beam of the neighboring cell is necessary, it instructs the handover and beam change of the terminal through L1/L2 signaling in step 1j-20. It is different from the existing operation in that the L1/L2 signaling can also trigger a handover.
  • the L1/L2 signaling is a case where the MAC CE and DCI are used, and all information indicating a specific beam of the neighboring cell and a serving cell change are indicated in the MAC CE (when the MAC CE indicates only one beam), or specific multiple beams of the neighboring cell are indicated in the MAC CE, and in the DCI transmitted subsequent to step 1j-20, one of the multiple beams of the neighboring cell activated in the MAC CE can be selected to instruct a handover. That is, steps 1j-25 may be omitted.
  • step 1j-30 the terminal checks whether a handover is indicated from the MAC CE and DCI signaling received in steps 1j-20 and 1j-25, and performs different operations thereafter. If the MAC CE and DCI received in step 1j-30 indicate a handover (if the MAC CE itself indicates a handover or if the MAC CE activates multiple beams and indicates a handover while indicating one of the corresponding beams in the DCI), the terminal performs a handover to a cell associated with the TCI state indicated in step 1j-35, and, according to the handover, also applies the settings for the corresponding target cell that were stored as pre-configuration for neighboring cells received in steps 1j-05 and 1j-10, and performs data transmission and reception using the indicated beam.
  • the terminal maintains the connection with the current serving cell in step 1j-40, changes the beam to the TCI state of the indicated cell, and then transmits and receives data through the corresponding beam. After the beam change, data is transmitted and received through the dedicated channels (PDCCH/PDSCH and PUCCH/PUSCH) of the corresponding beam.
  • the dedicated channels PDCCH/PDSCH and PUCCH/PUSCH
  • step 1j-45 L1 measurement and reporting for neighboring cells and RRM (Radio resource management) procedures, i.e. L3 measurement and channel reporting operations are performed.
  • the serving cell determines that a handover to a neighboring cell is necessary for the terminal based on the L1 measurement report or L3 measurement report of the terminal, it can instruct a handover for changing the serving cell.
  • a handover command can be received as L1/L2 signaling or an RRC message, and if the terminal receiving it is already performing beam changing to a neighboring cell and performing data transmission and reception to the cell, random access related operations can be omitted.
  • the terminal changes the serving cell according to the handover instruction and releases the settings of the previous serving cell.
  • FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating base station operations applied to examples of the present disclosure.
  • the base station receives an L3 measurement value report from the terminal, and based on the terminal's measurement values for surrounding frequencies and cells, determines whether the terminal requires handover and which cells are handover candidate cells.
  • the base station requests configuration information for L1/L2-based handover to neighboring cells and receives responses from the corresponding cells.
  • the present disclosure is characterized in that RRC configuration information is received from neighboring cells based on delta configuration in the step, and examples are configured according to what a reference cell and reference cell configuration information are, and a message exchange method through a related F1 interface, etc. are described in detail in drawings 1f, 1g, 1h, and 1i. That is, the base station notifies neighboring cells of a reference cell and reference cell configuration, and receives configuration information for L1/L2-based handover for other neighboring cells based on the reference cell configuration.
  • step 1k-15 the base station transmits to the terminal in the connected state an RRC configuration message generated including the neighboring cell configuration information received in step 1k-10. That is, the base station transmits to the terminal the configuration information in the neighboring cell applied after L1/L2-based movement is instructed from the serving cell through an RRC reconfiguration message.
  • the base station informs neighboring cells of the reference cell and the reference cell configuration, and receives configuration information for L1/L2-based handover to other neighboring cells based on the reference cell configuration.
  • the base station transmits to the terminal the configuration for updating specific configuration information for LTM candidate cells when there is a change in the specific configuration information from another base station or a DU and LTM candidate serving cell within the base station.
  • the base station receives an L1 measurement value from the terminal, and the measurement value may be a measurement value for a neighboring cell (non-serving cell) supporting L1/L2-based mobility.
  • the serving cell may determine whether to change the beam of the terminal based on the received measurement result, and if it is determined that a change from a specific beam of the serving cell to a specific beam of the neighboring cell is necessary, it instructs the terminal to change the beam through L1/L2 signaling in step 1k-25.
  • the L1/L2 signaling may be MAC CE or DCI, and includes information instructing a change to a specific beam of the neighboring cell.
  • a handover may also be simultaneously instructed through L1/L2 signaling in the corresponding step.
  • the serving cell When a handover is simultaneously instructed, the serving cell performs a handover procedure, and when the handover with the target cell is completed, deletes the terminal context and releases the connection. At this time, it is characterized in that the measurement value for determining whether to perform the handover is an L1 measurement.
  • the terminal maintains a connection state in step 1k-30.
  • the terminal performs data transmission and reception through dedicated channels (PDCCH/PDSCH and PUCCH/PUSCH) by applying configuration information for preset neighboring cells.
  • the terminal can also return to the current serving cell on the link with the neighboring cell.
  • the terminal can receive additional L1/L3 measurement reports while in the connection state with the terminal, and if the serving cell determines that a handover to the neighboring cell is necessary, the terminal can instruct a handover message to instruct a change of serving cell.
  • step 1k-35 when the terminal changes the serving cell according to the handover instruction, the terminal releases the settings of the previous serving cell.
  • Fig. 12 is a block diagram illustrating the internal structure of a terminal to which the present disclosure is applied.
  • the terminal includes an RF (Radio Frequency) processing unit (1l-10), a baseband processing unit (1l-20), a storage unit (1l-30), and a control unit (1l-40).
  • RF Radio Frequency
  • the RF processing unit (1l-10) above performs functions for transmitting and receiving signals through a wireless channel, such as signal band conversion and amplification. That is, the RF processing unit (1l-10) up-converts a baseband signal provided from the baseband processing unit (1l-20) into an RF band signal and transmits it through an antenna, and down-converts an RF band signal received through the antenna into a baseband signal.
  • the RF processing unit (1l-10) may include a transmission filter, a reception filter, an amplifier, a mixer, an oscillator, a DAC (digital to analog convertor), an ADC (analog to digital convertor), etc. In the drawing, only one antenna is shown, but the terminal may be equipped with multiple antennas.
  • the RF processing unit (1l-10) may include multiple RF chains. Furthermore, the RF processing unit (1l-10) may perform beamforming. For the above beamforming, the RF processing unit (1l-10) can adjust the phase and size of each signal transmitted and received through multiple antennas or antenna elements. In addition, the RF processing unit can perform MIMO and receive multiple layers when performing a MIMO operation.
  • the above baseband processing unit (1l-20) performs a conversion function between a baseband signal and a bit stream according to the physical layer specifications of the system. For example, when transmitting data, the baseband processing unit (1l-20) generates complex symbols by encoding and modulating a transmission bit stream. In addition, when receiving data, the baseband processing unit (1l-20) restores a reception bit stream by demodulating and decoding a baseband signal provided from the RF processing unit (1l-10).
  • the baseband processing unit (1l-20) when transmitting data, the baseband processing unit (1l-20) generates complex symbols by encoding and modulating a transmission bit stream, maps the complex symbols to subcarriers, and then configures OFDM symbols by performing an IFFT (inverse fast Fourier transform) operation and CP (cyclic prefix) insertion.
  • the baseband processing unit (1l-20) when receiving data, divides the baseband signal provided from the RF processing unit (1l-10) into OFDM symbol units, restores signals mapped to subcarriers through an FFT (fast Fourier transform) operation, and then restores the received bit string through demodulation and decoding.
  • FFT fast Fourier transform
  • the baseband processing unit (1l-20) and the RF processing unit (1l-10) transmit and receive signals as described above. Accordingly, the baseband processing unit (1l-20) and the RF processing unit (1l-10) may be referred to as a transmitter, a receiver, a transceiver, or a communication unit. Furthermore, at least one of the baseband processing unit (1l-20) and the RF processing unit (1l-10) may include a plurality of communication modules to support a plurality of different wireless access technologies. In addition, at least one of the baseband processing unit (1l-20) and the RF processing unit (1l-10) may include different communication modules to process signals of different frequency bands.
  • the different wireless access technologies may include a wireless LAN (e.g., IEEE 802.11), a cellular network (e.g., LTE), etc.
  • the different frequency bands may include super high frequency (SHF) (e.g., 2.NRHz, NRhz) bands, millimeter wave (mm wave) (e.g., 60GHz) bands.
  • SHF super high frequency
  • mm wave millimeter wave
  • the above storage unit (1l-30) stores data such as basic programs, application programs, and setting information for the operation of the terminal.
  • the storage unit (1l-30) can store information related to a second access node that performs wireless communication using the second wireless access technology.
  • the storage unit (1l-30) provides stored data according to a request from the control unit (1l-40).
  • control unit (1l-40) controls the overall operations of the terminal.
  • the control unit (1l-40) transmits and receives signals through the baseband processing unit (1l-20) and the RF processing unit (1l-10).
  • the control unit (1l-40) records and reads data in the storage unit (1l-30).
  • the control unit (1l-40) may include at least one processor.
  • the control unit (1l-40) may include a CP (communication processor) that performs control for communication and an AP (application processor) that controls upper layers such as application programs.
  • CP communication processor
  • AP application processor
  • Figure 13 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a base station according to the present disclosure.
  • the base station is configured to include an RF processing unit (1m-10), a baseband processing unit (1m-20), a backhaul communication unit (1m-30), a storage unit (1m-40), and a control unit (1m-50).
  • the RF processing unit (1m-10) above performs functions for transmitting and receiving signals through a wireless channel, such as signal band conversion and amplification. That is, the RF processing unit (1m-10) up-converts a baseband signal provided from the baseband processing unit (1m-20) into an RF band signal and transmits it through an antenna, and down-converts an RF band signal received through the antenna into a baseband signal.
  • the RF processing unit (1m-10) may include a transmission filter, a reception filter, an amplifier, a mixer, an oscillator, a DAC, an ADC, etc. In the drawing, only one antenna is shown, but the first access node may have multiple antennas.
  • the RF processing unit (1m-10) may include multiple RF chains.
  • the RF processing unit (1m-10) may perform beamforming.
  • the RF processing unit (1m-10) can adjust the phase and size of each signal transmitted and received through multiple antennas or antenna elements.
  • the RF processing unit can perform a downward MIMO operation by transmitting one or more layers.
  • the above baseband processing unit (1m-20) performs a conversion function between a baseband signal and a bit stream according to the physical layer specifications of the first wireless access technology. For example, when transmitting data, the baseband processing unit (1m-20) encodes and modulates a transmission bit stream to generate complex symbols. In addition, when receiving data, the baseband processing unit (1m-20) restores a reception bit stream by demodulating and decoding a baseband signal provided from the RF processing unit (1m-10). For example, in the case of OFDM, when transmitting data, the baseband processing unit (1m-20) encodes and modulates a transmission bit stream to generate complex symbols, maps the complex symbols to subcarriers, and then configures OFDM symbols through IFFT operation and CP insertion.
  • OFDM when transmitting data, the baseband processing unit (1m-20) encodes and modulates a transmission bit stream to generate complex symbols, maps the complex symbols to subcarriers, and then configures OFDM symbols through IFFT operation and CP insertion.
  • the baseband processing unit (1m-20) divides the baseband signal provided from the RF processing unit (1m-10) into OFDM symbol units, restores signals mapped to subcarriers through FFT operation, and then restores the received bit stream through demodulation and decoding.
  • the baseband processing unit (1m-20) and the RF processing unit (1m-10) transmit and receive signals as described above. Accordingly, the baseband processing unit (1m-20) and the RF processing unit (1m-10) may be referred to as a transmitter, a receiver, a transceiver, a communication unit, or a wireless communication unit.
  • the above backhaul communication unit (1m-30) provides an interface for performing communication with other nodes within the network. That is, the backhaul communication unit (1m-30) converts a bit string transmitted from the main base station to another node, such as an auxiliary base station or core network, into a physical signal, and converts a physical signal received from the other node into a bit string.
  • the above storage unit (1m-40) stores data such as basic programs, application programs, and setting information for the operation of the above base station.
  • the storage unit (1m-40) can store information on bearers allocated to connected terminals, measurement results reported from connected terminals, and the like.
  • the storage unit (1m-40) can store information that serves as a judgment criterion for whether to provide or terminate multiple connections to a terminal.
  • the storage unit (1m-40) provides stored data according to a request from the control unit (1m-50).
  • the above control unit (1m-50) controls the overall operations of the above base station.
  • the control unit (1m-50) transmits and receives signals through the baseband processing unit (1m-20) and the RF processing unit (1m-10) or through the backhaul communication unit (1m-30).
  • the control unit (1m-50) records and reads data in the storage unit (1m-40).
  • the control unit (1m-50) may include at least one processor.
  • the components included in the present disclosure are expressed in the singular or plural form according to the specific embodiments presented.
  • the singular or plural expressions are selected to suit the presented situation for the convenience of explanation, and the present disclosure is not limited to the singular or plural components, and even if a component is expressed in the plural form, it may be composed of the singular form, or even if a component is expressed in the singular form, it may be composed of the plural form.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

The present disclosure relates to a 5G or 6G communication system for supporting higher data transmission rates. The present disclosure discloses a method and apparatus for providing configuration information for mobility support of terminal.

Description

차세대 이동 통신 시스템에서 L1/L2 기반의 이동성 지원을 위한 후보 셀들의 설정 정보를 효율적으로 전달하는 방법 및 장치Method and device for efficiently transmitting configuration information of candidate cells for supporting L1/L2-based mobility in a next-generation mobile communication system

본 개시는 단말의 이동성 지원을 위한 설정 정보를 제공하는 방법 및 장치에 대한 것이다. The present disclosure relates to a method and device for providing configuration information for supporting mobility of a terminal.

5G 이동통신 기술은 빠른 전송 속도와 새로운 서비스가 가능하도록 넓은 주파수 대역을 정의하고 있으며, 3.5 기가헤르츠(3.5GHz) 등 6GHz 이하 주파수('Sub 6GHz') 대역은 물론 28GHz와 39GHz 등 밀리미터파(㎜Wave)로 불리는 초고주파 대역('Above 6GHz')에서도 구현이 가능하다. 또한, 5G 통신 이후(Beyond 5G)의 시스템이라 불리어지는 6G 이동통신 기술의 경우, 5G 이동통신 기술 대비 50배 빨라진 전송 속도와 10분의 1로 줄어든 초저(Ultra Low) 지연시간을 달성하기 위해 테라헤르츠(Terahertz) 대역(예를 들어, 95GHz에서 3 테라헤르츠(3THz) 대역과 같은)에서의 구현이 고려되고 있다.5G mobile communication technology defines a wide frequency band to enable fast transmission speeds and new services, and can be implemented not only in the sub-6GHz frequency band, such as 3.5 gigahertz (3.5GHz), but also in the ultra-high frequency band called millimeter wave (㎜Wave), such as 28GHz and 39GHz ('Above 6GHz'). In addition, for 6G mobile communication technology, which is called the system after 5G communication (Beyond 5G), implementation in the terahertz band (for example, the 3 terahertz (3THz) band at 95GHz) is being considered to achieve a transmission speed that is 50 times faster than 5G mobile communication technology and an ultra-low delay time that is reduced by one-tenth.

5G 이동통신 기술의 초기에는, 초광대역 서비스(enhanced Mobile BroadBand, eMBB), 고신뢰/초저지연 통신(Ultra-Reliable Low-Latency Communications, URLLC), 대규모 기계식 통신 (massive Machine-Type Communications, mMTC)에 대한 서비스 지원과 성능 요구사항 만족을 목표로, 초고주파 대역에서의 전파의 경로손실 완화 및 전파의 전달 거리를 증가시키기 위한 빔포밍(Beamforming) 및 거대 배열 다중 입출력(Massive MIMO), 초고주파수 자원의 효율적 활용을 위한 다양한 뉴머롤로지 지원(복수 개의 서브캐리어 간격 운용 등)와 슬롯 포맷에 대한 동적 운영, 다중 빔 전송 및 광대역을 지원하기 위한 초기 접속 기술, BWP(Band-Width Part)의 정의 및 운영, 대용량 데이터 전송을 위한 LDPC(Low Density Parity Check) 부호와 제어 정보의 신뢰성 높은 전송을 위한 폴라 코드(Polar Code)와 같은 새로운 채널 코딩 방법, L2 선-처리(L2 pre-processing), 특정 서비스에 특화된 전용 네트워크를 제공하는 네트워크 슬라이싱(Network Slicing) 등에 대한 표준화가 진행되었다.In the early stages of 5G mobile communication technology, the goal was to support services and satisfy performance requirements for enhanced Mobile Broadband (eMBB), Ultra-Reliable Low-Latency Communications (URLLC), and massive Machine-Type Communications (mMTC), including beamforming and massive MIMO to mitigate path loss of radio waves in ultra-high frequency bands and increase the transmission distance of radio waves, support for various numerologies (such as operation of multiple subcarrier intervals) and dynamic operation of slot formats for efficient use of ultra-high frequency resources, initial access technology to support multi-beam transmission and wideband, definition and operation of BWP (Bidth Part), new channel coding methods such as LDPC (Low Density Parity Check) codes for large-capacity data transmission and Polar Code for reliable transmission of control information, and L2 pre-processing (L2 Standardization has been made for network slicing, which provides dedicated networks specialized for specific services, and pre-processing.

현재, 5G 이동통신 기술이 지원하고자 했던 서비스들을 고려하여 초기의 5G 이동통신 기술 개선(improvement) 및 성능 향상(enhancement)을 위한 논의가 진행 중에 있으며, 차량이 전송하는 자신의 위치 및 상태 정보에 기반하여 자율주행 차량의 주행 판단을 돕고 사용자의 편의를 증대하기 위한 V2X(Vehicle-to-Everything), 비면허 대역에서 각종 규제 상 요구사항들에 부합하는 시스템 동작을 목적으로 하는 NR-U(New Radio Unlicensed), NR 단말 저전력 소모 기술(UE Power Saving), 지상 망과의 통신이 불가능한 지역에서 커버리지 확보를 위한 단말-위성 직접 통신인 비 지상 네트워크(Non-Terrestrial Network, NTN), 위치 측위(Positioning) 등의 기술에 대한 물리계층 표준화가 진행 중이다. Currently, discussions are underway on improving and enhancing the initial 5G mobile communication technology, taking into account the services that the 5G mobile communication technology was intended to support, and physical layer standardization is in progress for technologies such as V2X (Vehicle-to-Everything) to assist in driving decisions of autonomous vehicles and increase user convenience based on the vehicle's own location and status information transmitted by the vehicle, NR-U (New Radio Unlicensed) for the purpose of system operation that complies with various regulatory requirements in unlicensed bands, NR terminal low power consumption technology (UE Power Saving), Non-Terrestrial Network (NTN), which is direct terminal-satellite communication to secure coverage in areas where communication with terrestrial networks is impossible, and Positioning.

뿐만아니라, 타 산업과의 연계 및 융합을 통한 새로운 서비스 지원을 위한 지능형 공장 (Industrial Internet of Things, IIoT), 무선 백홀 링크와 액세스 링크를 통합 지원하여 네트워크 서비스 지역 확장을 위한 노드를 제공하는 IAB(Integrated Access and Backhaul), 조건부 핸드오버(Conditional Handover) 및 DAPS(Dual Active Protocol Stack) 핸드오버를 포함하는 이동성 향상 기술(Mobility Enhancement), 랜덤액세스 절차를 간소화하는 2 단계 랜덤액세스(2-step RACH for NR) 등의 기술에 대한 무선 인터페이스 아키텍쳐/프로토콜 분야의 표준화 역시 진행 중에 있으며, 네트워크 기능 가상화(Network Functions Virtualization, NFV) 및 소프트웨어 정의 네트워킹(Software-Defined Networking, SDN) 기술의 접목을 위한 5G 베이스라인 아키텍쳐(예를 들어, Service based Architecture, Service based Interface), 단말의 위치에 기반하여 서비스를 제공받는 모바일 엣지 컴퓨팅(Mobile Edge Computing, MEC) 등에 대한 시스템 아키텍쳐/서비스 분야의 표준화도 진행 중이다.In addition, standardization of wireless interface architecture/protocols for technologies such as the Industrial Internet of Things (IIoT) to support new services through linkage and convergence with other industries, Integrated Access and Backhaul (IAB) to provide nodes for expanding network service areas by integrating wireless backhaul links and access links, Mobility Enhancement including Conditional Handover and Dual Active Protocol Stack (DAPS) handover, and 2-step RACH for NR to simplify random access procedures is also in progress, and standardization of system architecture/services for 5G baseline architecture (e.g. Service based Architecture, Service based Interface) for grafting Network Functions Virtualization (NFV) and Software-Defined Networking (SDN) technologies, and Mobile Edge Computing (MEC) that provides services based on the location of the terminal is also in progress.

이와 같은 5G 이동통신 시스템이 상용화되면, 폭발적인 증가 추세에 있는 커넥티드 기기들이 통신 네트워크에 연결될 것이며, 이에 따라 5G 이동통신 시스템의 기능 및 성능 강화와 커넥티드 기기들의 통합 운용이 필요할 것으로 예상된다. 이를 위해, 증강현실(Augmented Reality, AR), 가상현실(Virtual Reality, VR), 혼합 현실(Mixed Reality, MR) 등을 효율적으로 지원하기 위한 확장 현실(eXtended Reality, XR), 인공지능(Artificial Intelligence, AI) 및 머신러닝(Machine Learning, ML)을 활용한 5G 성능 개선 및 복잡도 감소, AI 서비스 지원, 메타버스 서비스 지원, 드론 통신 등에 대한 새로운 연구가 진행될 예정이다.When such 5G mobile communication systems are commercialized, an explosive increase in connected devices will be connected to the communication network, which will require enhanced functions and performance of 5G mobile communication systems and integrated operation of connected devices. To this end, new research will be conducted on improving 5G performance and reducing complexity, AI service support, metaverse service support, drone communications, etc. using eXtended Reality (XR), Artificial Intelligence (AI), and Machine Learning (ML) to efficiently support Augmented Reality (AR), Virtual Reality (VR), and Mixed Reality (MR).

또한, 이러한 5G 이동통신 시스템의 발전은 6G 이동통신 기술의 테라헤르츠 대역에서의 커버리지 보장을 위한 신규 파형(Waveform), 전차원 다중입출력(Full Dimensional MIMO, FD-MIMO), 어레이 안테나(Array Antenna), 대규모 안테나(Large Scale Antenna)와 같은 다중 안테나 전송 기술, 테라헤르츠 대역 신호의 커버리지를 개선하기 위해 메타물질(Metamaterial) 기반 렌즈 및 안테나, OAM(Orbital Angular Momentum)을 이용한 고차원 공간 다중화 기술, RIS(Reconfigurable Intelligent Surface) 기술 뿐만 아니라, 6G 이동통신 기술의 주파수 효율 향상 및 시스템 네트워크 개선을 위한 전이중화(Full Duplex) 기술, 위성(Satellite), AI(Artificial Intelligence)를 설계 단계에서부터 활용하고 종단간(End-to-End) AI 지원 기능을 내재화하여 시스템 최적화를 실현하는 AI 기반 통신 기술, 단말 연산 능력의 한계를 넘어서는 복잡도의 서비스를 초고성능 통신과 컴퓨팅 자원을 활용하여 실현하는 차세대 분산 컴퓨팅 기술 등의 개발에 기반이 될 수 있을 것이다.In addition, the development of these 5G mobile communication systems will require new waveforms to ensure coverage in the terahertz band of 6G mobile communication technology, multi-antenna transmission technologies such as Full Dimensional MIMO (FD-MIMO), Array Antenna, and Large Scale Antenna, metamaterial-based lenses and antennas to improve coverage of terahertz band signals, high-dimensional spatial multiplexing technology using Orbital Angular Momentum (OAM), and Reconfigurable Intelligent Surface (RIS) technology, as well as full duplex technology to improve frequency efficiency and system network of 6G mobile communication technology, satellite, AI (Artificial Intelligence) from the design stage and AI-based communication technology that implements end-to-end AI support functions to realize system optimization, and ultra-high-performance communication and computing resources to provide services with complexity that goes beyond the limits of terminal computing capabilities. It could serve as a basis for the development of next-generation distributed computing technologies that utilize this technology.

한편, 단말은 현재 서빙 셀로부터 특정 빔을 통해 서비스를 받고 있을 때, 다른 셀에 속한 빔을 측정하고 이를 현재 서빙 셀의 기지국으로 보고할 수 있고, 기지국은 주변 셀의 빔이 더 좋다고 판단되면, L1/L2 시그널링을 통해, 단말에게 해당 셀로의 셀 변경이 수행되도록 지시할 수 있다. 이때, 주변 셀들로의 핸드오버를 수행하도록 RRC 설정 정보, 특히 셀의 물리적 설정, 무선 베어러 설정, 측정 설정 등을 단말에게 전달함에 있어, 후보 셀들에 대한 특정 RRC 설정 정보의 변경만을 전달할 수 있도록 하는 효과적인 메시지 구조가 필요하다.Meanwhile, when a terminal is currently receiving a service from a specific beam from a serving cell, the terminal can measure a beam belonging to another cell and report it to the base station of the current serving cell, and if the base station determines that a beam of a neighboring cell is better, the base station can instruct the terminal to perform a cell change to the corresponding cell through L1/L2 signaling. At this time, when transmitting RRC configuration information, particularly, cell physical configuration, radio bearer configuration, and measurement configuration, to the terminal to perform a handover to neighboring cells, an effective message structure is required that can transmit only changes in specific RRC configuration information for candidate cells.

이에 본 개시의 일 목적은, 주변 셀들로의 핸드오버를 수행할 때 적용되는 정보나 설정들을 단말에게 전달함에 있어, 후보 셀들에 대한 특정 RRC 설정 정보의 변경만을 전달할 수 있도록 하는 효과적인 메시지 구조를 제안하는 것이다.Accordingly, one purpose of the present disclosure is to propose an effective message structure that can transmit only changes in specific RRC configuration information for candidate cells when transmitting information or settings applied when performing handover to neighboring cells to a terminal.

상기와 같은 문제점을 해결하기 위한 본 개시에 따른 일 예시에 따른 통신 시스템에서 단말의 방법에 있어서, 기지국으로부터, LTM(layer 1/layer 2 triggered mobility) 후보 설정에 대한 제1 정보를 포함하는 제1 무선 자원 제어(radio resource control, RRC) 메시지를 수신하는 단계; 상기 기지국으로부터, 상기 LTM 후보 설정에 대한 제2 정보를 포함하는 제2 RRC 메시지를 수신하는 단계; 및 상기 기지국으로, 상기 제2 정보에 기반하여 후보 셀들에 대하여 수행된 L1(layer 1) 측정을 보고하는 단계를 포함하고,In order to solve the above problem, according to an example of the present disclosure, in a communication system, a method of a terminal comprises the steps of: receiving, from a base station, a first radio resource control (RRC) message including first information on LTM (layer 1/layer 2 triggered mobility) candidate setting; receiving, from the base station, a second RRC message including second information on the LTM candidate setting; and reporting, to the base station, L1 (layer 1) measurement performed on candidate cells based on the second information.

상기 제2 정보는, 상기 LTM 후보 설정을 업데이트하는 RRC 설정을 포함하고, 상기 후보 셀들에 대한 셀그룹 설정 정보를 포함하는 상기 RRC 설정은, 상기 제1 RRC 메시지에 포함된 라디오 베어러 설정 또는 측정 설정 중 적어도 하나의 업데이트된 정보를 더 포함할 수 있다.The second information includes an RRC configuration for updating the LTM candidate configuration, and the RRC configuration including cell group configuration information for the candidate cells may further include updated information of at least one of a radio bearer configuration or a measurement configuration included in the first RRC message.

또한, 본 개시의 일 예시에 따른 통신 시스템에서 기지국의 방법에 있어서, 단말로, LTM(layer 1/layer 2 triggered mobility) 후보 설정에 대한 제1 정보를 포함하는 제1 무선 자원 제어(radio resource control, RRC) 메시지를 전송하는 단계; 상기 LTM 후보 설정을 업데이트하는 RRC 설정을 획득하는 단계; 상기 단말로, 상기 RRC 설정을 포함하는, 상기 LTM 후보 설정에 대한 제2 정보를 포함하는 제2 RRC 메시지를 전송하는 단계; 및 상기 단말로부터, 상기 제2 정보에 기반하여 후보 셀들에 대한 L1(layer 1) 측정 보고를 수신하는 단계를 포함하고, 상기 후보 셀들에 대한 셀그룹 설정 정보를 포함하는 상기 RRC 설정은, 상기 제1 RRC 메시지에 포함된 라디오 베어러 설정 또는 측정 설정 중 적어도 하나의 업데이트된 정보를 더 포함할 수 있다.In addition, in a method of a base station in a communication system according to an example of the present disclosure, the method includes: transmitting, to a terminal, a first radio resource control (RRC) message including first information on LTM (layer 1/layer 2 triggered mobility) candidate configuration; acquiring an RRC configuration for updating the LTM candidate configuration; transmitting, to the terminal, a second RRC message including second information on the LTM candidate configuration, the second RRC message including the RRC configuration; and receiving, from the terminal, an L1 (layer 1) measurement report for candidate cells based on the second information, wherein the RRC configuration including cell group configuration information for the candidate cells may further include updated information on at least one of a radio bearer configuration or a measurement configuration included in the first RRC message.

또한, 본 개시의 일 예시에 따른 통신 시스템에서 단말에 있어서, 송수신부; 및 기지국으로부터, LTM(layer 1/layer 2 triggered mobility) 후보 설정에 대한 제1 정보를 포함하는 제1 무선 자원 제어(radio resource control, RRC) 메시지를 수신하도록 상기 송수신부를 제어하고, 상기 기지국으로부터, 상기 LTM 후보 설정에 대한 제2 정보를 포함하는 제2 RRC 메시지를 수신하도록 상기 송수신부를 제어하며, 및 상기 기지국으로, 상기 제2 정보에 기반하여 후보 셀들에 대하여 수행된 L1(layer 1) 측정을 보고하도록 상기 송수신부를 제어하는 제어부를 포함하고, 상기 제2 정보는, 상기 LTM 후보 설정을 업데이트하는 RRC 설정을 포함하고, 상기 후보 셀들에 대한 셀그룹 설정 정보를 포함하는 상기 RRC 설정은, 상기 제1 RRC 메시지에 포함된 라디오 베어러 설정 또는 측정 설정 중 적어도 하나의 업데이트된 정보를 더 포함할 수 있다.In addition, in a communication system according to an example of the present disclosure, a terminal, comprising: a transceiver; and a control unit configured to control the transceiver to receive, from a base station, a first radio resource control (RRC) message including first information about LTM (layer 1/layer 2 triggered mobility) candidate configuration, and to control the transceiver to receive, from the base station, a second RRC message including second information about the LTM candidate configuration, and to control the transceiver to report, to the base station, L1 (layer 1) measurement performed on candidate cells based on the second information, wherein the second information includes an RRC configuration that updates the LTM candidate configuration, and the RRC configuration including cell group configuration information for the candidate cells may further include updated information on at least one of a radio bearer configuration or a measurement configuration included in the first RRC message.

또한, 본 개시의 일 예시에 따른 통신 시스템에서 기지국에 있어서, 송수신부; 및 단말로, LTM(layer 1/layer 2 triggered mobility) 후보 설정에 대한 제1 정보를 포함하는 제1 무선 자원 제어(radio resource control, RRC) 메시지를 전송하도록 상기 송수신부를 제어하고, 상기 LTM 후보 설정을 업데이트하는 RRC 설정을 획득하며, 상기 단말로, 상기 RRC 설정을 포함하는, 상기 LTM 후보 설정에 대한 제2 정보를 포함하는 제2 RRC 메시지를 전송하도록 상기 송수신부를 제어하고, 및 상기 단말로부터, 상기 제2 정보에 기반하여 후보 셀들에 대한 L1(layer 1) 측정 보고를 수신하도록 상기 송수신부를 제어하는 제어부를 포함하고, 상기 후보 셀들에 대한 셀그룹 설정 정보를 포함하는 상기 RRC 설정은, 상기 제1 RRC 메시지에 포함된 라디오 베어러 설정 또는 측정 설정 중 적어도 하나의 업데이트된 정보를 더 포함할 수 있다.In addition, in a communication system according to an example of the present disclosure, a base station, a transceiver; and a control unit configured to control the transceiver to transmit, to a terminal, a first radio resource control (RRC) message including first information on LTM (layer 1/layer 2 triggered mobility) candidate configuration, obtain an RRC configuration that updates the LTM candidate configuration, control the transceiver to transmit, to the terminal, a second RRC message including second information on the LTM candidate configuration, the RRC configuration, and receive, from the terminal, an L1 (layer 1) measurement report for candidate cells based on the second information, wherein the RRC configuration including cell group configuration information for the candidate cells may further include updated information on at least one of a radio bearer configuration or a measurement configuration included in the first RRC message.

본 개시의 일 실시 예에 따르면, LTM(L1/L2 triggered mobility) 후보 셀들에 대한 RRC 설정 정보, 특히 셀의 물리적 설정, 무선 베어러 설정, 측정 설정을 단말에게 전달함에 있어 특정 RRC 설정 정보만의 변경을 전달할 수 있게 되므로, 실제 단말에게 전달되는 RRC 설정 정보의 오버헤드를 상당히 줄일 수 있는 효과가 있다.According to one embodiment of the present disclosure, when transmitting RRC configuration information for LTM (L1/L2 triggered mobility) candidate cells, particularly, physical configuration of the cell, radio bearer configuration, and measurement configuration to a terminal, only changes in specific RRC configuration information can be transmitted, so that the overhead of RRC configuration information actually transmitted to the terminal can be significantly reduced.

도 1은 본 개시가 적용되는 차세대 이동 통신 시스템의 구조를 도시하는 도면이다.FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating the structure of a next-generation mobile communication system to which the present disclosure is applied.

도 2는 본 개시가 적용될 수 있는 차세대 이동통신 시스템의 무선 프로토콜 구조를 나타낸 도면이다.FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a wireless protocol structure of a next-generation mobile communication system to which the present disclosure can be applied.

도 3은 본 개시가 적용될 수 있는 또 다른 차세대 이동 통신 시스템의 구조를 도시하는 도면이다.FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating the structure of another next-generation mobile communication system to which the present disclosure can be applied.

도 4는 본 개시에서 참고하는 셀간 빔 관리에 대한 시나리오로써, 단말이 서빙 셀과의 연결 상태를 유지한 채로 L1/L2 기반으로 빔 변경을 지원하는 주변 셀의 TRP (transmission/reception point)의 빔을 통해 데이터를 송수신하는 시나리오를 도시한 도면이다.FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating a scenario for inter-cell beam management referred to in the present disclosure, in which a terminal transmits and receives data through a beam of a TRP (transmission/reception point) of a neighboring cell that supports beam changing based on L1/L2 while maintaining a connection state with a serving cell.

도 5a는 단말이 L1/L2 기반 빔 변경을 지원하는 셀의 TRP 로 서빙 셀 및 빔을 변경하여 데이터를 송수신하는 시나리오를 도시한 도면이다.FIG. 5a is a diagram illustrating a scenario in which a terminal transmits and receives data by changing a serving cell and beam to a TRP of a cell that supports L1/L2-based beam changing.

도 5b는 단말이 L1/L2 기반 빔 변경을 지원하는 셀의 TRP 로 서빙 셀 및 빔을 변경하여 데이터를 송수신하는 시나리오를 도시한 도면이다.FIG. 5b is a diagram illustrating a scenario in which a terminal transmits and receives data by changing a serving cell and beam to a TRP of a cell that supports L1/L2-based beam changing.

도 6은 본 개시에 적용되는 예시 1로써, intra-CU 시나리오에서 L1/L2 기반의 핸드오버를 위한 주변 셀들에 대한 설정에 대해, 효과적인 RRC 설정 업데이트를 제공하기 위한 제 1 LTM 후보 셀 RRC 설정 방법 및 절차를 도시한 도면이다. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a first LTM candidate cell RRC configuration method and procedure for providing effective RRC configuration update for configuration of surrounding cells for L1/L2-based handover in an intra-CU scenario, as an example 1 applied to the present disclosure.

도 7은 본 개시에 적용되는 예시 2로써, intra-CU 시나리오에서 L1/L2 기반의 핸드오버를 위한 주변 셀들에 대한 설정에 대해, 효과적인 RRC 설정 업데이트를 제공하기 위한 제 2 LTM 후보 셀 RRC 설정 방법 및 절차를 도시한 도면이다. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a second LTM candidate cell RRC configuration method and procedure for providing effective RRC configuration update for configuration of surrounding cells for L1/L2 based handover in an intra-CU scenario, as Example 2 applied to the present disclosure.

도 8은 본 개시에 적용되는 예시 3으로써, inter-CU 시나리오에서 L1/L2 기반의 핸드오버를 위한 주변 셀들에 대한 설정에 대해, 효과적인 RRC 설정 업데이트를 제공하기 위한 제 1 LTM 후보 셀 RRC 설정 방법 및 절차를 도시한 도면이다. FIG. 8 is a diagram illustrating a first LTM candidate cell RRC configuration method and procedure for providing effective RRC configuration update for configuration of surrounding cells for L1/L2 based handover in an inter-CU scenario, as an example 3 applied to the present disclosure.

도 9는 본 개시에 적용되는 예시 4로써, inter-CU 시나리오에서 L1/L2 기반의 핸드오버를 위한 주변 셀들에 대한 설정에 대해, 효과적인 RRC 설정 업데이트를 제공하기 위한 제 2 LTM 후보 셀 RRC 설정 방법 및 절차를 도시한 도면이다. FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating a second LTM candidate cell RRC configuration method and procedure for providing effective RRC configuration update for configuration of neighboring cells for L1/L2 based handover in an inter-CU scenario, as Example 4 applied to the present disclosure.

도 10은 본 개시의 예시들에 적용되고, L1/L2 기반의 빔 변경 및 핸드오버를 수행하는 전체 단말 동작을 도시한 도면이다.FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating the overall terminal operation for performing L1/L2-based beam changing and handover, applied to examples of the present disclosure.

도 11은 본 개시의 예시들에 적용되는 기지국 동작을 도시한 도면이다.FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating base station operation applied to examples of the present disclosure.

도 12는 본 개시를 적용한 단말의 내부 구조를 도시하는 블록도이다.Fig. 12 is a block diagram illustrating the internal structure of a terminal to which the present disclosure is applied.

도 13은 본 개시에 따른 기지국의 구성을 나타낸 블록도이다.Figure 13 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a base station according to the present disclosure.

이하 첨부된 도면을 참조하여 본 발명의 동작 원리를 상세히 설명한다. 하기에서 본 발명을 설명하기에 있어 관련된 공지 기능 또는 구성에 대한 구체적인 설명이 본 발명의 요지를 불필요하게 흐릴 수 있다고 판단되는 경우에는 그 상세한 설명을 생략할 것이다. 그리고 후술되는 용어들은 본 발명에서의 기능을 고려하여 정의된 용어들로서 이는 사용자, 운용자의 의도 또는 관례 등에 따라 달라질 수 있다. 그러므로 그 정의는 본 명세서 전반에 걸친 내용을 토대로 내려져야 할 것이다. 이하 설명에서 사용되는 접속 노드(node)를 식별하기 위한 용어, 망 객체(network entity)들을 지칭하는 용어, 메시지들을 지칭하는 용어, 망 객체들 간 인터페이스를 지칭하는 용어, 다양한 식별 정보들을 지칭하는 용어 등은 설명의 편의를 위해 예시된 것이다. 따라서, 본 발명이 후술되는 용어들에 한정되는 것은 아니며, 동등한 기술적 의미를 가지는 대상을 지칭하는 다른 용어가 사용될 수 있다. Hereinafter, the operating principle of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the attached drawings. In the following description of the present invention, if it is determined that a specific description of a related known function or configuration may unnecessarily obscure the gist of the present invention, the detailed description thereof will be omitted. In addition, the terms described below are terms defined in consideration of the functions in the present invention, and these may vary depending on the intention or custom of the user or operator. Therefore, the definitions should be made based on the contents throughout this specification. In the following description, terms for identifying a connection node, terms referring to network entities, terms referring to messages, terms referring to interfaces between network objects, terms referring to various identification information, etc. are examples for the convenience of explanation. Therefore, the present invention is not limited to the terms described below, and other terms referring to objects having equivalent technical meanings may be used.

이하 설명의 편의를 위하여, 본 발명은 3GPP LTE(3rd Generation Partnership Project Long Term Evolution) 규격에서 정의하고 있는 용어 및 명칭들을 사용한다. 하지만, 본 발명이 상기 용어 및 명칭들에 의해 한정되는 것은 아니며, 다른 규격에 따르는 시스템에도 동일하게 적용될 수 있다.For convenience of explanation below, the present invention uses terms and names defined in the 3GPP LTE (3rd Generation Partnership Project Long Term Evolution) standard. However, the present invention is not limited by the above terms and names, and can be equally applied to systems that comply with other standards.

도 1은 본 발명이 적용되는 차세대 이동통신 시스템의 구조를 도시하는 도면이다.Figure 1 is a drawing illustrating the structure of a next-generation mobile communication system to which the present invention is applied.

도 1을 참조하면, 도시한 바와 같이 차세대 이동통신 시스템의 무선 액세스 네트워크는 차세대 기지국(New Radio Node B, 이하 NR NB, 1a-10)과 NR CN(New Radio Core Network, 혹은 NG CN: Next Generation Core Network, 1a-05)로 구성된다. 사용자 단말(New Radio User Equipment, 이하 NR UE 또는 단말, 1a-15)은 NR NB(1a-10) 및 NR CN(1a-05)를 통해 외부 네트워크에 접속한다.Referring to FIG. 1, as illustrated, a wireless access network of a next-generation mobile communication system is composed of a next-generation base station (New Radio Node B, hereinafter referred to as NR NB, 1a-10) and an NR CN (New Radio Core Network, or NG CN: Next Generation Core Network, 1a-05). A user terminal (New Radio User Equipment, hereinafter referred to as NR UE or terminal, 1a-15) accesses an external network through an NR NB (1a-10) and an NR CN (1a-05).

도 1에서 NR NB(1a-10)는 기존 LTE 시스템의 eNB(Evolved Node B)에 대응된다. NR NB는 NR UE(1a-15)와 무선 채널로 연결되며 기존 노드 B 보다 더 월등한 서비스를 제공해줄 수 있다. 차세대 이동통신 시스템에서는 모든 사용자 트래픽이 공용 채널(shared channel)을 통해 서비스 되므로, UE들의 버퍼 상태, 가용 전송 전력 상태, 채널 상태 등의 상태 정보를 취합해서 스케줄링을 하는 장치가 필요하며, 이를 NR NB(1a-10)가 담당한다. 하나의 NR NB는 통상 다수의 셀들을 제어한다. 기존 LTE 대비 초고속 데이터 전송을 구현하기 위해서 기존 최대 대역폭 이상을 가질 수 있고, 직교 주파수 분할 다중 방식(Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing, 이하 OFDM이라 한다)을 무선 접속 기술로 하여 추가적으로 빔포밍 기술이 접목될 수 있다. 또한 단말의 채널 상태에 맞춰 변조 방식(modulation scheme)과 채널 코딩률(channel coding rate)을 결정하는 적응 변조 코딩(Adaptive Modulation & Coding, 이하 AMC라 한다) 방식을 적용한다. In Fig. 1, NR NB (1a-10) corresponds to eNB (Evolved Node B) of the existing LTE system. NR NB is connected to NR UE (1a-15) via a wireless channel and can provide a service that is superior to the existing Node B. In the next-generation mobile communication system, since all user traffic is serviced through a shared channel, a device that collects status information such as buffer status, available transmission power status, and channel status of UEs and performs scheduling is required, and this is handled by NR NB (1a-10). One NR NB usually controls multiple cells. In order to implement ultra-high-speed data transmission compared to the existing LTE, it can have a bandwidth greater than the existing maximum bandwidth, and orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) can be used as a wireless access technology and additionally beamforming technology can be grafted. In addition, an adaptive modulation and coding (AMC) method is applied, which determines the modulation scheme and channel coding rate according to the channel status of the terminal.

NR CN(1a-05)는 이동성 지원, 베어러 설정, QoS 설정 등의 기능을 수행한다. NR CN는 단말에 대한 이동성 관리 기능은 물론 각종 제어 기능을 담당하는 장치로 다수의 기지국들과 연결된다. 또한 차세대 이동통신 시스템은 기존 LTE 시스템과도 연동될 수 있으며, NR CN이 MME(1a-25)와 네트워크 인터페이스를 통해 연결된다. MME는 기존 기지국인 eNB(1a-30)과 연결된다.NR CN (1a-05) performs functions such as mobility support, bearer setup, and QoS setup. NR CN is a device that handles various control functions as well as mobility management functions for terminals and is connected to multiple base stations. In addition, the next-generation mobile communication system can be linked with the existing LTE system, and NR CN is connected to MME (1a-25) through a network interface. MME is connected to the existing base station, eNB (1a-30).

도 2는 본 개시가 적용될 수 있는 차세대 이동통신 시스템의 무선 프로토콜 구조를 나타낸 도면이다.FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a wireless protocol structure of a next-generation mobile communication system to which the present disclosure can be applied.

도 2를 참조하면, 차세대 이동통신 시스템의 무선 프로토콜은 단말과 NR 기지국에서 각각 NR SDAP(1b-01, 1b-45), NR PDCP(1b-05, 1b-40), NR RLC(1b-10, 1b-35), NR MAC(1b-15, 1b-30)으로 이루어진다. Referring to FIG. 2, the wireless protocol of the next-generation mobile communication system consists of NR SDAP (1b-01, 1b-45), NR PDCP (1b-05, 1b-40), NR RLC (1b-10, 1b-35), and NR MAC (1b-15, 1b-30) in the terminal and NR base station, respectively.

NR SDAP(1b-01, 1b-45)의 주요 기능은 다음의 기능들 중 일부를 포함할 수 있다.Key features of NR SDAP (1b-01, 1b-45) may include some of the following:

- 사용자 데이터의 전달 기능(transfer of user plane data)- Transfer of user plane data

- 상향 링크와 하향 링크에 대해서 QoS flow와 데이터 베어러의 맵핑 기능(mapping between a QoS flow and a DRB for both DL and UL)- Mapping between a QoS flow and a DRB for both DL and UL

- 상향 링크와 하향 링크에 대해서 QoS flow ID의 마킹 기능(marking QoS flow ID in both DL and UL packets)- Marking QoS flow ID in both DL and UL packets

- 상향 링크 SDAP PDU들에 대해서 relective QoS flow를 데이터 베어러에 맵핑시키는 기능 (reflective QoS flow to DRB mapping for the UL SDAP PDUs). - Ability to map relective QoS flow to data bearer for the UL SDAP PDUs (reflective QoS flow to DRB mapping for the UL SDAP PDUs).

상기 SDAP 계층 장치에 대해 단말은 RRC 메시지로 각 PDCP 계층 장치 별로 혹은 베어러 별로 혹은 로지컬 채널 별로 SDAP 계층 장치의 헤더를 사용할 지 여부 혹은 SDAP 계층 장치의 기능을 사용할 지 여부를 설정 받을 수 있으며, SDAP 헤더가 설정된 경우, SDAP 헤더의 NAS QoS 반영 설정 1비트 지시자(NAS reflective QoS)와 AS QoS 반영 설정 1비트 지시자(AS reflective QoS)로 단말이 상향 링크와 하향 링크의 QoS flow와 데이터 베어러에 대한 맵핑 정보를 갱신 혹은 재설정할 수 있도록 지시할 수 있다. 상기 SDAP 헤더는 QoS를 나타내는 QoS flow ID 정보를 포함할 수 있다. 상기 QoS 정보는 원할한 서비스를 지원하기 위한 데이터 처리 우선 순위, 스케쥴링 정보 등으로 사용될 수 있다. For the above SDAP layer device, the terminal can be configured by an RRC message for each PDCP layer device, by bearer, or by logical channel, whether to use the header of the SDAP layer device or whether to use the function of the SDAP layer device, and if the SDAP header is configured, the terminal can be instructed to update or reset the QoS flow of the uplink and downlink and the mapping information for the data bearer by using a 1-bit indicator for reflecting NAS QoS (NAS reflective QoS) and a 1-bit indicator for reflecting AS QoS (AS reflective QoS) of the SDAP header. The SDAP header can include QoS flow ID information indicating QoS. The QoS information can be used as data processing priority, scheduling information, etc. to support a desired service.

NR PDCP (1b-05, 1b-40)의 주요 기능은 다음의 기능들 중 일부를 포함할 수 있다. The main functions of NR PDCP (1b-05, 1b-40) may include some of the following functions:

● 헤더 압축 및 압축 해제 기능(Header compression and decompression: ROHC only)● Header compression and decompression (ROHC only)

● 사용자 데이터 전송 기능 (Transfer of user data)● Transfer of user data function

● 순차적 전달 기능(In-sequence delivery of upper layer PDUs)● In-sequence delivery of upper layer PDUs

● 비순차적 전달 기능 (Out-of-sequence delivery of upper layer PDUs)● Out-of-sequence delivery of upper layer PDUs

● 순서 재정렬 기능(PDCP PDU reordering for reception)● Reordering function (PDCP PDU reordering for reception)

● 중복 탐지 기능(Duplicate detection of lower layer SDUs)● Duplicate detection of lower layer SDUs

● 재전송 기능(Retransmission of PDCP SDUs)● Retransmission function (Retransmission of PDCP SDUs)

● 암호화 및 복호화 기능(Ciphering and deciphering)● Encryption and deciphering functions (Ciphering and deciphering)

● 타이머 기반 SDU 삭제 기능(Timer-based SDU discard in uplink)● Timer-based SDU discard in uplink

상기에서 NR PDCP 장치의 순서 재정렬 기능(reordering)은 하위 계층에서 수신한 PDCP PDU들을 PDCP SN(sequence number)을 기반으로 순서대로 재정렬하는 기능을 말하며, 재정렬된 순서대로 데이터를 상위 계층에 전달하는 기능을 포함할 수 있으며, 혹은 순서를 고려하지 않고, 바로 전달하는 기능을 포함할 수 있으며, 순서를 재정렬하여 유실된 PDCP PDU들을 기록하는 기능을 포함할 수 있으며, 유실된 PDCP PDU들에 대한 상태 보고를 송신 측에 하는 기능을 포함할 수 있으며, 유실된 PDCP PDU들에 대한 재전송을 요청하는 기능을 포함할 수 있다. The reordering function of the NR PDCP device above refers to the function of reordering PDCP PDUs received from a lower layer in order based on the PDCP SN (sequence number), and may include a function of transmitting data to an upper layer in the reordered order, or may include a function of transmitting data directly without considering the order, may include a function of recording lost PDCP PDUs by reordering the order, may include a function of reporting a status of lost PDCP PDUs to the transmitting side, and may include a function of requesting retransmission of lost PDCP PDUs.

NR RLC(1b-10, 1b-35)의 주요 기능은 다음의 기능들 중 일부를 포함할 수 있다.The main functions of NR RLC (1b-10, 1b-35) may include some of the following functions:

● 데이터 전송 기능(Transfer of upper layer PDUs)● Data transfer function (Transfer of upper layer PDUs)

● 순차적 전달 기능(In-sequence delivery of upper layer PDUs)● In-sequence delivery of upper layer PDUs

● 비순차적 전달 기능(Out-of-sequence delivery of upper layer PDUs)● Out-of-sequence delivery of upper layer PDUs

● 기능(Error Correction through ARQ)● Function (Error Correction through ARQ)

● 접합, 분할, 재조립 기능(Concatenation, segmentation and reassembly of RLC SDUs)● Concatenation, segmentation and reassembly of RLC SDUs

● 재분할 기능(Re-segmentation of RLC data PDUs)● Re-segmentation of RLC data PDUs

● 순서 재정렬 기능(Reordering of RLC data PDUs)● Reordering of RLC data PDUs

● 중복 탐지 기능(Duplicate detection)● Duplicate detection function

● 오류 탐지 기능(Protocol error detection)● Error detection function (Protocol error detection)

● DU 삭제 기능(RLC SDU discard)● DU discard function (RLC SDU discard)

● RLC 재수립 기능(RLC re-establishment)● RLC re-establishment function

상기에서 NR RLC 장치의 순차적 전달 기능(In-sequence delivery)은 하위 계층으로부터 수신한 RLC SDU들을 순서대로 상위 계층에 전달하는 기능을 말하며, 원래 하나의 RLC SDU가 여러 개의 RLC SDU들로 분할되어 수신된 경우, 이를 재조립하여 전달하는 기능을 포함할 수 있으며, 수신한 RLC PDU들을 RLC SN(sequence number) 혹은 PDCP SN(sequence number)를 기준으로 재정렬하는 기능을 포함할 수 있으며, 순서를 재정렬하여 유실된 RLC PDU들을 기록하는 기능을 포함할 수 있으며, 유실된 RLC PDU들에 대한 상태 보고를 송신 측에 하는 기능을 포함할 수 있으며, 유실된 RLC PDU들에 대한 재전송을 요청하는 기능을 포함할 수 있으며, 유실된 RLC SDU가 있을 경우, 유실된 RLC SDU 이전까지의 RLC SDU들만을 순서대로 상위 계층에 전달하는 기능을 포함할 수 있으며, 혹은 유실된 RLC SDU가 있어도 소정의 타이머가 만료되었다면 타이머가 시작되기 전에 수신된 모든 RLC SDU들을 순서대로 상위 계층에 전달하는 기능을 포함할 수 있으며, 혹은 유실된 RLC SDU가 있어도 소정의 타이머가 만료되었다면 현재까지 수신된 모든 RLC SDU들을 순서대로 상위 계층에 전달하는 기능을 포함할 수 있다. 또한 상기에서 RLC PDU들을 수신하는 순서대로(일련번호, Sequence number의 순서와 상관없이, 도착하는 순으로) 처리하여 PDCP 장치로 순서와 상관없이(Out-of sequence delivery) 전달할 수도 있으며, segment 인 경우에는 버퍼에 저장되어 있거나 추후에 수신될 segment들을 수신하여 온전한 하나의 RLC PDU로 재구성한 후, 처리하여 PDCP 장치로 전달할 수 있다. 상기 NR RLC 계층은 접합(Concatenation) 기능을 포함하지 않을 수 있고 상기 기능을 NR MAC 계층에서 수행하거나 NR MAC 계층의 다중화(multiplexing) 기능으로 대체할 수 있다. The in-sequence delivery function of the NR RLC device above refers to the function of sequentially transmitting RLC SDUs received from a lower layer to an upper layer, and may include a function of reassembling and transmitting RLC SDUs when an RLC SDU is originally divided into multiple RLC SDUs and received, a function of rearranging received RLC PDUs based on RLC SN (sequence number) or PDCP SN (sequence number), a function of recording lost RLC PDUs by rearranging the sequence, a function of reporting the status of lost RLC PDUs to the transmitting side, a function of requesting retransmission of lost RLC PDUs, a function of sequentially transmitting only RLC SDUs up to the lost RLC SDU to an upper layer in case of a lost RLC SDU, or a function of sequentially transmitting all RLC SDUs received before the timer starts if a predetermined timer expires even when a lost RLC SDU is present to an upper layer. Or, even if there are lost RLC SDUs, if a predetermined timer has expired, it may include a function to sequentially deliver all RLC SDUs received up to the present to the upper layer. In addition, the RLC PDUs may be processed in the order they are received (in the order of arrival, regardless of the order of the sequence number) and delivered to the PDCP device regardless of the order (Out-of sequence delivery). In case of segments, the segments stored in the buffer or to be received later may be received, reconstructed into a single complete RLC PDU, processed, and delivered to the PDCP device. The NR RLC layer may not include a concatenation function, and the function may be performed in the NR MAC layer or replaced with a multiplexing function of the NR MAC layer.

상기에서 NR RLC 장치의 비순차적 전달 기능(Out-of-sequence delivery)은 하위 계층으로부터 수신한 RLC SDU들을 순서와 상관없이 바로 상위 계층으로 전달하는 기능을 말하며, 원래 하나의 RLC SDU가 여러 개의 RLC SDU들로 분할되어 수신된 경우, 이를 재조립하여 전달하는 기능을 포함할 수 있으며, 수신한 RLC PDU들의 RLC SN 혹은 PDCP SN을 저장하고 순서를 정렬하여 유실된 RLC PDU들을 기록해두는 기능을 포함할 수 있다. The out-of-sequence delivery function of the NR RLC device mentioned above refers to the function of directly delivering RLC SDUs received from a lower layer to an upper layer regardless of the order, and may include a function of reassembling and delivering multiple RLC SDUs when an original RLC SDU is received divided into multiple RLC SDUs, and may include a function of storing and arranging the RLC SN or PDCP SN of received RLC PDUs to record lost RLC PDUs.

NR MAC(1b-15, 1b-30)은 한 단말에 구성된 여러 NR RLC 계층 장치들과 연결될 수 있으며, NR MAC의 주요 기능은 다음의 기능들 중 일부를 포함할 수 있다. NR MAC (1b-15, 1b-30) can be connected to multiple NR RLC layer devices configured in one terminal, and the main functions of NR MAC can include some of the following functions.

● 맵핑 기능(Mapping between logical channels and transport channels)● Mapping function (Mapping between logical channels and transport channels)

● 다중화 및 역다중화 기능(Multiplexing/demultiplexing of MAC SDUs)● Multiplexing/demultiplexing of MAC SDUs

● 스케쥴링 정보 보고 기능(Scheduling information reporting)● Scheduling information reporting function

● HARQ 기능(Error correction through HARQ)● HARQ function (Error correction through HARQ)

● 로지컬 채널 간 우선 순위 조절 기능(Priority handling between logical channels of one UE)● Priority handling between logical channels of one UE

● 단말간 우선 순위 조절 기능(Priority handling between UEs by means of dynamic scheduling)● Priority handling between UEs by means of dynamic scheduling

● MBMS 서비스 확인 기능(MBMS service identification)● MBMS service identification function

● 전송 포맷 선택 기능(Transport format selection)● Transport format selection function

● 패딩 기능(Padding)● Padding function

NR PHY 계층(1b-20, 1b-25)은 상위 계층 데이터를 채널 코딩 및 변조하고, OFDM 심벌로 만들어서 무선 채널로 전송하거나, 무선 채널을 통해 수신한 OFDM 심벌을 복조하고 채널 디코딩해서 상위 계층으로 전달하는 동작을 수행할 수 있다.The NR PHY layer (1b-20, 1b-25) can perform operations of channel coding and modulating upper layer data, converting it into OFDM symbols and transmitting it over a wireless channel, or demodulating and channel decoding OFDM symbols received over a wireless channel and transmitting them to a higher layer.

도 3은 본 개시가 적용될 수 있는 또 다른 차세대 이동 통신 시스템의 구조를 도시하는 도면이다.FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating the structure of another next-generation mobile communication system to which the present disclosure can be applied.

도 3을 참고하면, 빔 기반으로 동작하는 NR gNB(1c-05)가 서비스하는 셀은 여러 개의 TRP(Transmission Reception Point, 1c-10, 1c-15, 1c-20, 1c-25, 1c-30, 1c-35, 1c-40)들로 구성될 수 있다. TRP(1c-10~1c-40)는 기존 NR 기지국(eNB)에서 물리적인 신호를 송수신하는 일부 기능을 분리시킨 블록을 나타내며, 다수의 안테나로 구성되어 있다. 상기 NR gNB(1c-05)은 CU(Central Unit)으로 TRP는 DU(Distributed Unit)으로도 표현될 수 있다. Referring to FIG. 3, a cell served by an NR gNB (1c-05) operating on a beam basis may be composed of multiple TRPs (Transmission Reception Points, 1c-10, 1c-15, 1c-20, 1c-25, 1c-30, 1c-35, 1c-40). TRPs (1c-10 to 1c-40) represent blocks that separate some of the functions of transmitting and receiving physical signals from an existing NR base station (eNB), and are composed of multiple antennas. The NR gNB (1c-05) may be expressed as a CU (Central Unit), and the TRP may also be expressed as a DU (Distributed Unit).

상기 NR gNB(1c-05)와 TRP의 기능은 1c-45와 같은 PDCP/RLC/MAC/PHY 계층에서 각 계층을 분리시켜서 구성될 수 있다. 예를 들어, 상기 TRP는 PHY계층만을 가지고 해당 계층의 기능을 수행할 수 있고(1c-15, 1c-25), PHY계층과 MAC계층만을 가지고 해당 계층들의 기능을 수행할 수 있으며(1c-10, 1c-35, 1c-40), 또는 PHY계층, MAC계층, 그리고 RLC 계층만을 가지고 해당 계층들의 기능을 수행할 수 있다(1c-20, 1c-30). 특히 TRP(1c-10~1c-40)는 다수의 송수신 안테나를 이용해서 여러 방향의 좁은 빔을 생성하여 데이터를 송수신하는 빔포밍 기술을 사용할 수 있다. The functions of the above NR gNB (1c-05) and TRP can be configured by separating each layer in the PDCP/RLC/MAC/PHY layers such as 1c-45. For example, the TRP can perform the function of the corresponding layer with only the PHY layer (1c-15, 1c-25), can perform the functions of the corresponding layers with only the PHY layer and the MAC layer (1c-10, 1c-35, 1c-40), or can perform the functions of the corresponding layers with only the PHY layer, the MAC layer, and the RLC layer (1c-20, 1c-30). In particular, the TRP (1c-10 to 1c-40) can use beamforming technology that generates narrow beams in various directions using multiple transmit/receive antennas to transmit and receive data.

사용자 단말(1c-50)은 TRP(1c-10~1c-40)를 통해 NR gNB(1c-05) 및 외부 네트워크에 접속한다. 상기 NR gNB(1c-05)은 사용자들에게 서비스하기 위해 단말들의 버퍼 상태, 가용 전송 전력 상태, 채널 상태 등의 상태 정보를 취합해서 스케쥴링하여, 상기 단말들과 코어 망(CN, Core network), 특히 AMF/SMF(1c-50)간의 연결을 지원한다.User terminals (1c-50) connect to NR gNBs (1c-05) and external networks via TRPs (1c-10 to 1c-40). The NR gNBs (1c-05) collect and schedule status information, such as buffer status, available transmission power status, and channel status of terminals, to provide services to users, thereby supporting connections between the terminals and a core network (CN), particularly AMF/SMF (1c-50).

본 개시에서의 TRP는 PHY 계층만을 가지고 해당 계층의 기능을 수행할 수 있는 구조(1c-15, 1c-25)를 전제로 하여 설명하기로 한다.The TRP in this disclosure will be explained on the premise that the structure (1c-15, 1c-25) can perform the function of the corresponding layer with only the PHY layer.

도 4는 본 개시에서 참고하는 셀간 빔 관리에 대한 시나리오로써, 단말이 서빙 셀과의 연결 상태를 유지한 상태로, L1/L2 기반의 빔 변경을 지원하는 주변 셀의 TRP (transmission/reception point)의 빔을 통해 데이터를 송수신하는 시나리오를 도시한 도면이다.FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating a scenario for inter-cell beam management referred to in the present disclosure, in which a terminal transmits and receives data through a beam of a TRP (transmission/reception point) of a neighboring cell that supports L1/L2-based beam change while maintaining a connection state with a serving cell.

본 도면에서는 하나의 DU(Distributed unit, 1d-05) 내에 복수의 셀(TRP1-Cell1, TRP2-Cell2; 1d-10, 1d-15)가 존재하는 경우를 기술하고 있지만, 본 개시의 전반적인 내용은 inter-DU(각각의 DU가 하나의 TRP-Cell을 구성)의 경우에도 적용이 가능하다. 또한, 본 개시에서, L1/L2 기반의 이동성(빔 변경 및 서빙 셀 변경)을 지원하는 서빙 셀이 아닌 셀(TRP 2, Cell 2)을, 주변 셀(neighbor cell), 서빙 셀이 아닌 셀(non-serving cell), 서빙 셀과 PCI(physical cell identity)가 다른 추가 셀(additional cell with the PCI different from the serving cell) 등으로 혼용해서 기재하기로 한다.Although this drawing describes a case where multiple cells (TRP1-Cell1, TRP2-Cell2; 1d-10, 1d-15) exist within one DU (Distributed unit, 1d-05), the overall content of the present disclosure is also applicable to the inter-DU case (where each DU constitutes one TRP-Cell). In addition, in the present disclosure, a non-serving cell (TRP 2, Cell 2) supporting L1/L2 based mobility (beam change and serving cell change) will be described interchangeably as a neighbor cell, a non-serving cell, an additional cell with the PCI different from the serving cell, etc.

기존의 단말 빔 변경 절차(1d-45)는, 단말(1d-20)이 서빙 셀 1의 TRP 1(1d-10)을 통해 연결 상태에서 데이터를 송수신하고 있고, 최적의 빔인 TCI(transmission configuration indicator) state 1(1d-25, 1d-30)으로 맞춰져 있을 수 있다. 이 단계에서 단말은 서빙 셀(1d-10)로부터 RRC 설정 정보를 통해 서빙 셀과 PCI가 다른 추가 셀(TRP 2-Cell 2, 1d-15)에 대한 L3 채널 측정(RRM; radio resource management)을 위한 설정 정보를 수신할 수 있으며, 이에 기반하여 해당 주파수 및 셀에 대한 L3 measurement 동작(1d-46)을 수행할 수 있다. 이후, 서빙 셀(TRP 1-Cell 1, 1d-10)은 단말(1d-20)로부터 보고된 측정 값을 기반으로 셀(TRP 2-Cell 2, 1d-15)으로의 핸드오버를 지시(1d-47)할 수 있으며, 이에 따라 핸드오버가 완료되면, 추가적인 RRC 설정 정보가 TRP 2-Cell 2(1d-15)를 통해 단말(1d-20)에게 전달(1d-48)될 수 있다. 상기 추가적인 RRC 설정 정보에는 해당 셀에서의 UL/DL 설정 정보, L1 measurement 관련 설정(CSI-RS 측정 및 보고) 등이 포함될 수 있으며, 특히 PDCCH(physical downlink control channel) 및 PDSCH(physical downlink shared channel) 채널을 위한 TCI state 설정 정보가 포함될 수 있다. 단말은 설정에 따라 L1 measurement를 수행(1d-49)하고, 기지국은 단말로부터의 측정 보고에 따라 L1/L2 시그널링을 통해 TCI state를 업데이트 한다(1d-50). 여기서 최적의 빔인 TCI state 2(1d-40)가 단말에게 지시될 수 있다. 서빙 셀은, 핸드오버 이전까지는 Cell 1이지만, 핸드오버 이후에는 Cell 2가 된다. 다만, 이와 같이 핸드오버가 완료된 이후에도 단말에게 최적의 빔이 지시될 때까지는 많은 절차와 시간이 필요하다.The existing terminal beam change procedure (1d-45) is such that the terminal (1d-20) is transmitting and receiving data in a connected state through TRP 1 (1d-10) of serving cell 1, and may be set to the optimal beam, TCI (transmission configuration indicator) state 1 (1d-25, 1d-30). At this stage, the terminal can receive configuration information for L3 channel measurement (RRM; radio resource management) for an additional cell (TRP 2-Cell 2, 1d-15) having a different PCI from the serving cell through RRC configuration information from the serving cell (1d-10), and perform the L3 measurement operation (1d-46) for the corresponding frequency and cell based on this. Thereafter, the serving cell (TRP 1-Cell 1, 1d-10) can instruct (1d-47) a handover to the cell (TRP 2-Cell 2, 1d-15) based on the measurement value reported from the terminal (1d-20), and when the handover is completed accordingly, additional RRC configuration information can be transmitted (1d-48) to the terminal (1d-20) through TRP 2-Cell 2 (1d-15). The additional RRC configuration information may include UL/DL configuration information in the corresponding cell, L1 measurement related settings (CSI-RS measurement and reporting), and in particular, TCI state configuration information for PDCCH (physical downlink control channel) and PDSCH (physical downlink shared channel) channels. The terminal performs L1 measurement according to the settings (1d-49), and the base station updates the TCI state through L1/L2 signaling according to the measurement report from the terminal (1d-50). Here, the optimal beam, TCI state 2 (1d-40), can be indicated to the terminal. The serving cell is Cell 1 before the handover, but becomes Cell 2 after the handover. However, even after the handover is completed, many procedures and time are required until the optimal beam is indicated to the terminal.

상기 기존 단말 빔 변경 절차(1d-45)와 다르게 본 개시에서 고려하고 있는 향상된 빔 변경 기법(1d-55)은 다음과 같다. Unlike the above existing terminal beam changing procedure (1d-45), the improved beam changing technique (1d-55) considered in the present disclosure is as follows.

단말(1d-20)은 서빙 셀(1d-10)로부터 RRC 설정 정보(1d-56)를 통해, 서빙 셀과 PCI가 다른 추가 셀(TRP 2-Cell 2, 1d-15)과 연관된 빔 설정을, 서빙 셀로부터 전달받을 수 있다. 상기 서빙 셀과 PCI가 다른 추가 셀(TRP 2-Cell 2, 1d-15)과 연관된 빔 설정, 즉, TRP2에 해당하는 TCI state를 연관시키는 부분은 하기 표 1에서와 같이, 새로운 셀 ID(Physical cell ID, PCI; additionalPCI-r17)를 연관해서 지시하는 방법이 적용될 수 있다. The terminal (1d-20) can receive beam settings associated with an additional cell (TRP 2-Cell 2, 1d-15) having a different PCI from the serving cell (1d-10) through RRC configuration information (1d-56) from the serving cell. The beam settings associated with the additional cell (TRP 2-Cell 2, 1d-15) having a different PCI from the serving cell, i.e., the part that associates the TCI state corresponding to TRP2, can be applied by associating a new cell ID (Physical cell ID, PCI; additionalPCI-r17) as shown in Table 1 below.

Figure PCTKR2024095075-appb-img-000001
Figure PCTKR2024095075-appb-img-000001

또한, 해당 셀 간의 빔 관리를 위해서는 unified TCI state framework가 적용된다. Unified TCI state framework는 상향링크와 하향링크, 그리고 common 채널과 dedicated 채널에서 공통의 TCI state framework을 적용하는 것으로, 하기 표 2에서와 같이 Joint UL/DL 모드와 하기 표 3-1 및 표 3-2에서와 같이 separate UL/DL 모드 중 하나로 설정될 수 있다.In addition, a unified TCI state framework is applied for beam management between the cells. The unified TCI state framework applies a common TCI state framework to uplink and downlink, and to common channels and dedicated channels, and can be set to either a Joint UL/DL mode as shown in Table 2 below or a separate UL/DL mode as shown in Tables 3-1 and 3-2 below.

Figure PCTKR2024095075-appb-img-000002
Figure PCTKR2024095075-appb-img-000002

1. Joint UL/DL 모드: UL와 DL가 같은 TCI 설정을 공유하도록 설정(in PDSCH-Config)1. Joint UL/DL mode: Set UL and DL to share the same TCI settings (in PDSCH-Config)

Figure PCTKR2024095075-appb-img-000003
Figure PCTKR2024095075-appb-img-000003

Figure PCTKR2024095075-appb-img-000004
Figure PCTKR2024095075-appb-img-000004

2. Separate UL/DL 모드: UL와 DL가 각각의 TCI 설정을 제공. DL에 대한 TCI state는 dl-OrJoint-TCIStateList-r17 (in PDSCH-Config)에서의 설정을 따르고, UL에 대한 TCI state는 ul-TCI-StateList-r17 (in BWP-UplinkDedicated)을 따름2. Separate UL/DL mode: UL and DL provide their own TCI configurations. The TCI state for DL follows the configuration in dl-OrJoint-TCIStateList-r17 (in PDSCH-Config), and the TCI state for UL follows ul-TCI-StateList-r17 (in BWP-UplinkDedicated).

단말(1d-20)은 서빙 셀 1에 RRC(radio resource control) 연결된 상태에서, TRP 2-Cell 2에 대한 설정이 제공된 이후에는, 설정에 따라 해당 TRP 2-Cell 2에 대한 L1 measurement를 수행하고 해당 결과를 서빙 셀(Cell 1, 1d-10)에 보고한다(1d-57). 서빙 셀은 측정 결과에 따라 서빙 셀 빔(TCI state 1, 1d-25, 1d-30)에서 TRP 2(Cell 2, 1d-15)의 특정 빔(TCI state 2, 1d-35, 1d-40)으로의 변경이 필요하다고 판단되면, 빔 변경을 트리거링하고, 단말에게 L1/L2 시그널링을 통해 빔 변경을 지시한다(1d-58). 단말(1d-20)은 해당 지시를 통해 TRP 2(Cell 2, 1d-15)의 특정 빔(TCI state 2, 1d-40)으로 빔을 변경하고, 설정된 빔과 연관된 물리 채널 설정 및 상위 레이어 설정 동작을 수행한다. 해당 단계부터 단말(1d-20)은 서빙 셀(Cell 1, 1d-10)에 연결 상태로 있지만, TRP 2(Cell 2, 1d-15)의 채널 링크를 사용하여 데이터 송수신을 수행한다(PDCCH/PDSCH 수신, PUCCH(physical uplink control channel)/PUSCH(physical uplink shared channel) 송신). 다만, common control 채널에 대한 송수신은 서빙 셀(Cell 1, 1d-10)을 통해 수행된다. When the terminal (1d-20) is connected to the serving cell 1 via RRC (radio resource control), after the configuration for TRP 2-Cell 2 is provided, the terminal performs L1 measurement for the corresponding TRP 2-Cell 2 according to the configuration and reports the result to the serving cell (Cell 1, 1d-10) (1d-57). If the serving cell determines that a change from the serving cell beam (TCI state 1, 1d-25, 1d-30) to a specific beam (TCI state 2, 1d-35, 1d-40) of TRP 2 (Cell 2, 1d-15) is necessary based on the measurement result, the serving cell triggers the beam change and instructs the terminal to change the beam through L1/L2 signaling (1d-58). The terminal (1d-20) changes the beam to a specific beam (TCI state 2, 1d-40) of TRP 2 (Cell 2, 1d-15) through the instruction, and performs physical channel setting and upper layer setting operations related to the set beam. From this step, the terminal (1d-20) remains connected to the serving cell (Cell 1, 1d-10), but performs data transmission and reception (PDCCH/PDSCH reception, PUCCH (physical uplink control channel)/PUSCH (physical uplink shared channel) transmission) using the channel link of TRP 2 (Cell 2, 1d-15). However, transmission and reception for the common control channel are performed through the serving cell (Cell 1, 1d-10).

이후 단말(1d-20)은 독립된 서빙 셀에서 설정된 measurement 설정에 따라 L3 measurement 동작을 수행하며(1d-59), 서빙 기지국(Cell 1)으로부터 핸드오버 명령 메시지를 수신하고 Cell 2로 서빙 셀 변경을 수행할 수 있다(1d-60). 본 기법(1d-55)을 통해 단말(1d-20)은 서빙 셀에 연결된 상태에서 L1/L2 기반의 이동성을 지원하는 Cell 2의 특정 TRP 2와 데이터 송수신을 수행하고, 핸드오버가 된 이후에도 해당 빔을 연속적으로 사용할 수 있게 된다. Thereafter, the terminal (1d-20) performs L3 measurement operation according to the measurement settings set in the independent serving cell (1d-59), receives a handover command message from the serving base station (Cell 1), and can perform a serving cell change to Cell 2 (1d-60). Through this technique (1d-55), the terminal (1d-20) performs data transmission and reception with a specific TRP 2 of Cell 2 supporting L1/L2-based mobility while connected to the serving cell, and can continuously use the corresponding beam even after the handover.

참고로 상기의 1d-57 단계에서의 L1 measurement 및 report와 관련된 설정과, 동작에 대한 RRC 설정을 설명하면 하기와 같다. 해당 내용은 본 개시의 이하 실시 예에서도 기본적으로 적용되며 추후 실시 예에서 향상 기법이 추가될 수 있다.For reference, the settings related to L1 measurement and report in step 1d-57 above and the RRC settings for operation are described below. The contents are also basically applied to the following embodiments of the present disclosure, and improved techniques may be added in future embodiments.

1. CSI measurement 설정1. CSI measurement settings

   - 측정이 필요한 CSI-RS 자원 및 자원 풀(nzp-CSI-RS, csi-IM, csi-SSB)   - CSI-RS resources and resource pools requiring measurement (nzp-CSI-RS, csi-IM, csi-SSB)

   - 측정이 필요한 CSI-RS 자원 설정(aperiodic, semi-persistent) 및 트리거링 설정   - Setting up CSI-RS resources that require measurement (aperiodic, semi-persistent) and triggering settings

   - CSI-RS 자원이 SSB 자원을 참고하는 경우, 추가적인 PCI 정보를 제공해서 주변 셀로부터의 L1 measurement가 가능하도록 함(한 서빙 셀에서 최대 7개의 주변 셀(PCI) 추가 가능)   - When CSI-RS resources refer to SSB resources, additional PCI information is provided to enable L1 measurement from neighboring cells (up to 7 neighboring cells (PCI) can be added from one serving cell)

Figure PCTKR2024095075-appb-img-000005
Figure PCTKR2024095075-appb-img-000005

2. CSI report 설정2. CSI report settings

   - Report 타입: 주기적 보고, PUCCH로 반주기적 보고, PUSCH로 반주기적 보고, PUSCH로 비주기적 보고(periodic, semi-persistent for PUCCH, semi-persistent for PUSCH, aperiodic)   - Report type: periodic report, semi-periodic report on PUCCH, semi-periodic report on PUSCH, aperiodic report on PUSCH (periodic, semi-persistent for PUCCH, semi-persistent for PUSCH, aperiodic)

   - Report quantity   - Report quantity

   - 기타 보고에 필요한 설정들   - Settings required for other reports

도 5a 및 도 5b는 본 개시에서 참고하는 예시들로, 단말이 L1/L2 기반 빔 변경을 지원하는 셀의 TRP로 서빙 셀 및 빔을 변경하여 데이터를 송수신하는 시나리오를 도시한 도면이다. 본 도면에서는 하나의 DU(Distributed unit, 1e-05, 1e-35) 내에 복수의 셀(TRP1-Cell1, TRP2-Cell2; 1e-10, 1e-15, 1e-40, 1e-45)가 존재하는 경우를 도시하였으나, 본 개시의 전반적인 내용은 inter-DU(각각의 DU가 하나의 TRP-Cell을 구성)의 경우에도 적용이 가능할 수 있다. FIG. 5A and FIG. 5B are examples referred to in the present disclosure, illustrating a scenario in which a terminal transmits and receives data by changing a serving cell and beam to a TRP of a cell that supports L1/L2-based beam switching. In the present disclosure, a case in which multiple cells (TRP1-Cell1, TRP2-Cell2; 1e-10, 1e-15, 1e-40, 1e-45) exist within one DU (Distributed unit, 1e-05, 1e-35) is illustrated, but the overall content of the present disclosure can also be applied to an inter-DU (each DU constitutes one TRP-Cell) case.

도 4에서 상술한 기존 단말 빔 변경 절차(1d-45, 1d-55)와 다르게, 본 예시들에서 고려하고 있는 향상된 빔 변경 기법(1e-25, 1e-75)은 다음과 같다. Unlike the existing terminal beam changing procedure (1d-45, 1d-55) described in Fig. 4, the improved beam changing technique (1e-25, 1e-75) considered in these examples is as follows.

1. 예시 1(1e-25): 셀 간 빔 관리(변경) 동작 수행 이후, L1/L2 핸드오버 수행1. Example 1 (1e-25): After performing inter-cell beam management (change) operation, L1/L2 handover is performed.

2. 예시 2(1e-75): L1/L2 핸드오버 바로 수행2. Example 2 (1e-75): Perform L1/L2 handover immediately

먼저, 도 5a를 참조하여 예 1의 전체 동작을 설명하면, 단말(1e-20)은 서빙 셀(1e-10)로부터 RRC 설정 정보를 통해, 서빙 셀과 PCI가 다른 추가 셀(TRP 2-Cell 2, 1e-15)에 대한 common 설정 및 dedicated 설정 정보를 수신할 수 있다(1e-26). 즉, ServingCellID 혹은 candidateCellID (PCI와 연관된 셀 ID), ServingCellConfigCommon과 ServingCellConfig에 해당하는 설정 정보가 단말(1e-20)로 미리 제공될 수 있다. 해당 설정 정보는 RRC 설정에서 pre-configuration 형태로 제공될 수 있으며, 복수의 셀에 대한 설정 정보가 포함될 수 있다. 또한, 해당 설정은 단말이 해당 셀로의 이동(핸드오버) 시에 적용되는 모든 설정 정보(셀 설정, 베어러 설정, 측정관련 설정, security key 설정 등)를 포함하는 것을 특징으로 한다. 그리고, 해당 설정에서는 도 1d-56 단계에서 상술한 unified TCI state 설정과 L1 measurement 및 report와 관련된 설정들이 포함된다. First, referring to FIG. 5a to explain the entire operation of Example 1, the terminal (1e-20) can receive common configuration information and dedicated configuration information for an additional cell (TRP 2-Cell 2, 1e-15) having a different PCI from the serving cell (1e-10) through RRC configuration information (1e-26). That is, configuration information corresponding to ServingCellID or candidateCellID (cell ID associated with PCI), ServingCellConfigCommon and ServingCellConfig can be provided to the terminal (1e-20) in advance. The corresponding configuration information can be provided in the form of pre-configuration in the RRC configuration and can include configuration information for multiple cells. In addition, the corresponding configuration is characterized in that it includes all configuration information (cell configuration, bearer configuration, measurement-related configuration, security key configuration, etc.) applied when the terminal moves (handovers) to the corresponding cell. And, the setting includes the unified TCI state setting described in step 1d-56 and the settings related to L1 measurement and report.

본 도면에서의 예시에서는 L1/L2 핸드오버가 수행될 수 있는 candidate 주변 셀들에 대한 설정을 미리 제공하는 구조, 특히 셀 설정을 포함하는 셀 그룹 설정(CellGroupConfig), 무선 베어러 설정(RadioBearerConfig), L3 측정 관련 설정(MeasConfig)을 설정하는 방법에 대해 자세하게 설명한다. 상기의 설정 정보들을 단말에게 전달할 때, 특정 LTM 후보 셀들의 특정 설정 정보만을 업데이트 할 때보다 효율적으로 전달할 수 있는 방법을 고려한다. 뿐만 아니라, 셀 그룹 설정 내에서도 RLC bearer 설정, 로지컬 채널 설정, MAC 설정 등이 일반적으로 적용될 수 있을 경우 이를 효과적으로 설정하여 시그널링 오버헤드를 줄이는 방법도 함께 제안한다. 또한, 본 개시에서의 하기 예시에서는 intra-CU 뿐만 아니라 inter-CU 시나리오에 대해서도 고려해서 상기 해결 방법들을 구체화한다.In the example in this drawing, a structure for providing configurations in advance for candidate neighboring cells where L1/L2 handover can be performed, particularly a method for configuring cell group configurations (CellGroupConfig) including cell configurations, radio bearer configurations (RadioBearerConfig), and L3 measurement-related configurations (MeasConfig), is described in detail. When delivering the above configuration information to a terminal, a method for delivering it more efficiently than when only specific configuration information of specific LTM candidate cells is updated is considered. In addition, a method for reducing signaling overhead by effectively setting RLC bearer configurations, logical channel configurations, MAC configurations, etc. that can be generally applied within the cell group configuration is also proposed. In addition, the following examples in the present disclosure specify the above solutions by considering not only intra-CU but also inter-CU scenarios.

단말(1e-20)은 서빙 셀 1(1e-10)에 RRC 연결된 상태에서, TRP 2-Cell 2(1e-15)에 대한 설정이 제공된 이후에는 1e-27 단계에서 수신한 설정에 따라 해당 TRP 2-Cell 2(1e-15)에 대한 L1 measurement를 수행하고, 해당 결과를 서빙 셀(Cell 1, 1e-10)에 보고한다. 서빙 셀은 측정 결과에 따라 서빙 셀 빔(TCI state 1, 1e-25)에서 TRP 2(Cell 2, 1e-15)의 특정 빔(TCI state 2, 1e-40)으로의 변경이 필요하다고 판단되면, 1e-28 단계에서 빔 변경을 트리거링하고, 단말(1e-20)에게 L1/L2 시그널링을 통해 빔 변경을 지시한다. 단말(1e-20)은 해당 지시를 통해 TRP 2(Cell 2, 1e-15)으로 빔 변경을 수행하고, 해당 TRP 2(Cell 2, 1e-15)를 통해 데이터 송수신을 수행한다. 이때 서빙 셀 변경은 일어나지 않으며, 단말(1e-20)은 여전히 서빙 셀(Cell 1, 1e-10)에 RRC 연결이 되어있다. The terminal (1e-20) performs L1 measurement on the corresponding TRP 2-Cell 2 (1e-15) according to the settings received in step 1e-27 after the configuration for TRP 2-Cell 2 (1e-15) is provided while in an RRC-connected state to the serving cell 1 (1e-10) and reports the result to the serving cell (Cell 1, 1e-10). If the serving cell determines that a change from the serving cell beam (TCI state 1, 1e-25) to a specific beam (TCI state 2, 1e-40) of TRP 2 (Cell 2, 1e-15) is necessary based on the measurement result, it triggers a beam change in step 1e-28 and instructs the terminal (1e-20) to change the beam through L1/L2 signaling. The terminal (1e-20) performs a beam change to TRP 2 (Cell 2, 1e-15) through the instruction, and performs data transmission and reception through the TRP 2 (Cell 2, 1e-15). At this time, the serving cell change does not occur, and the terminal (1e-20) is still RRC connected to the serving cell (Cell 1, 1e-10).

이후 단말(1e-20)은 여전히 TRP 2-Cell 2(1e-15)에 대한 L1 measurement를 수행하고, 해당 결과를 서빙 셀(Cell 1, 1e-10)에 보고한다. 서빙 셀(Cell 1, 1e-10)은 단말(1e-20)이 보고하는 L1 measurement가 TRP 2-Cell 2(1e-15)로의 핸드오버를 위한 트리거링 조건(자세한 동작은 하기에 자세히 설명)을 만족한다 판단할 경우, 단말(1e-20)에게 핸드오버를 지시한다. 해당 지시는 L1/L2 메시지일 수 있다. 즉, MAC(medium access control) CE(control element) 혹은 DCI(downlink control information)에 핸드오버를 지시하는 지시자가 포함되어 있을 수 있다.After that, the terminal (1e-20) still performs L1 measurement for TRP 2-Cell 2 (1e-15) and reports the result to the serving cell (Cell 1, 1e-10). If the serving cell (Cell 1, 1e-10) determines that the L1 measurement reported by the terminal (1e-20) satisfies the triggering condition for handover to TRP 2-Cell 2 (1e-15) (the detailed operation is described in detail below), it instructs the terminal (1e-20) to perform a handover. The instruction may be an L1/L2 message. That is, an instruction for instructing a handover may be included in the MAC (medium access control) CE (control element) or DCI (downlink control information).

도 5b를 참조하여 예시 2의 전체 동작을 설명하면, 단말(1e-50)은 서빙 셀(1e-40)로부터 RRC 설정 정보를 통해 서빙 셀과 PCI가 다른 추가 셀(TRP 2-Cell 2, 1e-45)에 대한 common 설정 및 dedicated 설정 정보를 수신할 수 있다(1e-76). 즉, ServingCellID 혹은 candidateCellID(PCI와 연관된 셀 ID), ServingCellConfigCommon과 ServingCellConfig에 해당하는 설정 정보가 단말(1e-50)로 미리 제공될 수 있다. 여기에서, 해당 셀에 대한 설정 정보는 cell-level 설정이 아닌 Cell group 레벨의 설정(CellGroupConfig)일 수 있으며, 혹은 RRC 설정 메시지(RRCReconfiguration) 단위의 설정으로 전달될 수 있다.Referring to FIG. 5b to explain the entire operation of Example 2, the terminal (1e-50) can receive common configuration information and dedicated configuration information for an additional cell (TRP 2-Cell 2, 1e-45) having a different PCI from the serving cell (1e-40) through RRC configuration information (1e-76). That is, the configuration information corresponding to ServingCellID or candidateCellID (cell ID associated with PCI), ServingCellConfigCommon and ServingCellConfig can be provided to the terminal (1e-50) in advance. Here, the configuration information for the corresponding cell may be a configuration at the Cell group level (CellGroupConfig) rather than a cell-level configuration, or may be delivered as a configuration in the unit of an RRC configuration message (RRCReconfiguration).

해당 설정 정보는 RRC 설정에서 pre-configuration 형태로 제공될 수 있으며, 복수의 셀에 대한 설정 정보를 포함할 수 있다. 또한, 해당 설정은 단말(1e-50)이 해당 셀로의 이동(핸드오버) 시에 적용되는 모든 설정 정보(셀 설정, 베어러 설정, security key 설정 등)를 포함하는 것을 특징으로 한다. 그리고, 해당 설정에서는 도 1d-56 단계에서 상술한 unified TCI state 설정과 L1 measurement 및 report와 관련된 설정들이 포함된다. 본 도면에서의 예시에서는 L1/L2 핸드오버가 수행될 수 있는 candidate 주변 셀들에 대한 설정을 미리 제공하는 구조, 특히 candidate 주변 셀들에 대한 설정을 기준 셀(reference cell)에 대한 설정 정보와 delta configuration을 적용하는 방법에 대해 자세하게 설명한다.The corresponding configuration information can be provided in the form of pre-configuration in the RRC configuration, and can include configuration information for multiple cells. In addition, the corresponding configuration is characterized by including all configuration information (cell configuration, bearer configuration, security key configuration, etc.) that is applied when the terminal (1e-50) moves (handovers) to the corresponding cell. In addition, the corresponding configuration includes the unified TCI state configuration described above in step 1d-56 of FIG. 1 and the configuration related to L1 measurement and report. In the example in this drawing, a structure for providing configurations for candidate neighboring cells where L1/L2 handover can be performed in advance, and in particular, a method for applying configuration information for a reference cell and delta configuration to the configurations for candidate neighboring cells is described in detail.

단말(1e-50)은 서빙 셀 1(1e-40)에 RRC 연결된 상태에서, TRP 2-Cell 2(1e-45)에 대한 설정이 제공된 이후에는 1e-77 단계에서 수신한 설정에 따라 해당 TRP 2-Cell 2(1e-45)에 대한 L1 measurement를 수행하고, 해당 결과를 서빙 셀(Cell 1, 1e-40)에 보고한다. 서빙 셀은 측정 결과에 따라 서빙 셀 빔(TCI state 1, 1e-45)에서 TRP 2(Cell 2, 1e-45)의 특정 빔(TCI state 2, 1e-70)으로의 빔 변경과 동시에 핸드오버가 필요하다고 판단되면, 1e-78 단계에서 빔 변경 및 핸드오버를 트리거링하고, 단말(1e-50)에게 L1/L2 시그널링을 통해 빔 변경 및 핸드오버를 지시한다. 단말(1e-50)은 해당 지시를 통해 TRP 2(Cell 2, 1e-15)로 빔 변경과 동시에 핸드오버를 수행하고, 해당 TRP 2(Cell 2, 1e-15)를 통해 데이터 송수신을 수행한다. 이때 단말(1e-50)은 1e-76 단계에서 미리 설정 받은, 핸드오버가 수행되는 타겟 셀에 대한 설정 정보를 적용한다. 해당 단계에서 상향링크 동기를 맞출 필요가 있는지 여부에 따라 단말은 랜덤액세스를 수행할 수도 있고, 타겟 셀에 대한 랜덤액세스가 생략될 수도 있다. 자세한 동작은 이하 도면에서 설명한다.The terminal (1e-50), while in an RRC-connected state to the serving cell 1 (1e-40), performs L1 measurement on the corresponding TRP 2-Cell 2 (1e-45) according to the settings received in step 1e-77 after the settings for TRP 2-Cell 2 (1e-45) are provided, and reports the results to the serving cell (Cell 1, 1e-40). If the serving cell determines that a handover is necessary simultaneously with a beam change from the serving cell beam (TCI state 1, 1e-45) to a specific beam (TCI state 2, 1e-70) of TRP 2 (Cell 2, 1e-45) based on the measurement results, it triggers the beam change and handover in step 1e-78 and instructs the terminal (1e-50) to perform the beam change and handover through L1/L2 signaling. The terminal (1e-50) performs a handover to TRP 2 (Cell 2, 1e-15) at the same time as changing the beam through the instruction, and performs data transmission and reception through the TRP 2 (Cell 2, 1e-15). At this time, the terminal (1e-50) applies the configuration information for the target cell where the handover is performed, which was previously set in step 1e-76. Depending on whether uplink synchronization is required in the step, the terminal may perform random access or may omit random access to the target cell. The detailed operation is described in the drawings below.

본 개시의 하기 예시들에서는 LTM 후보 셀들에 대한 RRC 설정 정보가 셀 및 셀 그룹 설정, 무선 베어러 설정, 측정관련 설정을 포함하며, 상기 설정 정보들 중 최소한 한 개 이상의 설정이 변경되는 전체 동작을 고려한다. 이를 위해 하기 예시에서는 intra-CU 시나리오와 inter-CU 시나리오에 대해 각각 효과적인 RRC 설정 업데이트를 제공하기 위한 RRC 설정 구조를 적용하였을 때의 전체 절차를 설명한다. 특히 RRC 설정 구조에 대해서는 하기의 두 가지 방법을 제안한다.In the following examples of the present disclosure, the RRC configuration information for LTM candidate cells includes cell and cell group configuration, radio bearer configuration, and measurement-related configuration, and the entire operation in which at least one of the configuration information is changed is considered. To this end, the following examples describe the entire procedure when applying an RRC configuration structure to provide effective RRC configuration updates for intra-CU scenarios and inter-CU scenarios, respectively. In particular, the following two methods are proposed for the RRC configuration structure.

1. 제 1 LTM 후보 셀 RRC 설정 방법1. Method for setting up the 1st LTM candidate cell RRC

  - 각 LTM 후보 셀들(DU)로부터 수신한 셀 그룹 설정과, CU에서 생성하는 무선 베이러 설정과 측정 관련 설정을 CU에서 하나의 LTM 후보 셀 설정으로 생성하여 단말에게 전달- 무선 베이러 설정과 측정 관련 설정은 optional 하게 포함- Cell group settings received from each LTM candidate cell (DU), wireless carrier settings generated by the CU, and measurement-related settings are generated as a single LTM candidate cell setting in the CU and transmitted to the terminal - Wireless carrier settings and measurement-related settings are optionally included.

2. 제 2 LTM 후보 셀 RRC 설정 방법2. Method for setting up the 2nd LTM candidate cell RRC

  - 각 LTM 후보 셀들(DU)로부터 수신한 셀 그룹 설정과, CU에서 생성하는 무선 베이러 설정과 측정 관련 설정을 CU에서 별도로 생성/관리하여 단말에게 전달- Cell group settings received from each LTM candidate cell (DU), wireless carrier settings generated by the CU, and measurement-related settings are separately created/managed by the CU and delivered to the terminal.

  - 무선 베이러 설정과 측정 관련 설정은 optional 하게 별도의 리스트로 관리- Wireless carrier settings and measurement-related settings are optionally managed as a separate list.

특히, 셀 및 셀 그룹 설정은 DU에서 생성하는 셀 관련 주요한 설정들을 포함하며, 각 LTM 후보 셀들을 통해 직접 기지국이 수신할 수 있는 반면, 무선 베어러 및 레이어 3 측정 관련 설정은 CU에서 생성하게 된다. LTM에 대해서도, 무선 베어러 설정은 LTM 후보 셀들에서 split 베어러 설정의 필요성 혹은 LTM 후보 셀들에 DC 설정이 적용된 경우 해당 LTM 후보 셀의 SCG에 SRB 3를 설정 및 변경하는 동작이 필요할 수 있다. 이런 경우에 LTM 후보 셀에 대한 무선 베어러 설정을 업데이트 하는 동작이 필요하다. 또한, 기본적으로 하나의 CU에서는 아주 큰 영역을 커버하고 있고, 해당 CU에 포함된 주파수는 다양하다. 그러므로 L3 측정 관련 설정의 경우, 효율적인 주파수 대역별 측정관리를 위해 주파수 대역 별로 측정설정을 구분하는 동작이 효과적이다. LTM에 대해서도 inter frequency 동작을 지원하기 때문에, LTM 후보 셀들 별로 L3 측정관련 설정을 구분하여 설정하거나, 업데이트 하는 동작이 필요하다. 즉, 본 개시에서 제안하는 LTM 후보 셀들에 대한 RRC 설정 변경 가능한 구조를 통해 특정 LTM 후보 셀들에 대한 변경된 설정을 효과적으로 지원할 수 있게 된다. 본 개시에서는 예시 1과 예시 2에서 intra-CU 시나리오를 고려하고, 예시 3과 예시 4에서 inter-CU 시나리오를 고려한다.In particular, cell and cell group configurations include major cell-related configurations generated by the DU, which can be directly received by the base station through each LTM candidate cell, while radio bearer and layer 3 measurement-related configurations are generated by the CU. For LTM, radio bearer configuration may require split bearer configuration in LTM candidate cells, or may require an operation to set and change SRB 3 in the SCG of the LTM candidate cell when DC configuration is applied to the LTM candidate cells. In this case, an operation to update the radio bearer configuration for the LTM candidate cell is required. In addition, a very large area is basically covered by one CU, and the frequencies included in the CU are diverse. Therefore, for L3 measurement-related configurations, it is effective to distinguish measurement configurations by frequency band for efficient measurement management by frequency band. Since inter frequency operation is also supported for LTM, an operation to distinguish or update L3 measurement-related configurations by LTM candidate cells is required. That is, the changed configuration for specific LTM candidate cells can be effectively supported through the RRC configuration changeable structure for LTM candidate cells proposed in the present disclosure. In the present disclosure, the intra-CU scenario is considered in Examples 1 and 2, and the inter-CU scenario is considered in Examples 3 and 4.

또한, 상기의 LTM 후보 셀 RRC 설정 방법의 구체적인 설명은 하기 예시에서 상세히 설명한다. 참고로 CU가 DU로부터 수신하는 LTM 후보 셀의 RRC 설정 메시지가 CellGroupConfig인 경우에 해당하며, RRCReconfiguration 메시지로 전달되는 경우에는 제 1 LTM 후보 셀 RRC 설정 방법을 변형한 방법이 적용될 수 있다. 즉, DU가 CU에 CellGroupConfig 설정을 F1AP 인터페이스로 전달한 이후, 관련 무선 베이러 설정과 측정 관련 설정을 CU로부터 다시 수신하여, DU에서 하나의 LTM 후보 셀 설정으로 생성한 다음 이 설정이 포함된 RRCReconfiguration 메시지를 CU에게 F1AP 인터페이스로 전달한다. 본 개시에서는 해당 케이스에 대해서는 예시 1과 예시 3과의 유사성을 이유로 자세한 설명을 생략하지만, 앞서 설명한 방법을 예시 1과 예시 3에 적용하여 해당 방법도 적용될 수 있음을 제안한다. 즉, 예시 1과 예시 3과 비교해서 F1AP를 통해 CU와 DU가 LTM 후보 셀들에 대한 RRC 설정을 생성하는 추가적인 절차가 추가되는지 여부가 차이점으로 존재한다.In addition, a specific description of the above LTM candidate cell RRC configuration method is explained in detail in the following examples. For reference, this corresponds to a case where the RRC configuration message of the LTM candidate cell that the CU receives from the DU is CellGroupConfig, and when it is transmitted as an RRCReconfiguration message, a method that is a modification of the first LTM candidate cell RRC configuration method can be applied. That is, after the DU transmits the CellGroupConfig configuration to the CU through the F1AP interface, the DU receives the related radio carrier configuration and the measurement-related configuration from the CU again, generates one LTM candidate cell configuration in the DU, and then transmits an RRCReconfiguration message including the configuration to the CU through the F1AP interface. In the present disclosure, a detailed description of the case is omitted due to the similarity with Examples 1 and 3, but it is proposed that the method described above can also be applied to Examples 1 and 3. That is, the difference exists in whether an additional procedure for generating RRC configurations for LTM candidate cells by the CU and the DU through the F1AP is added compared to Examples 1 and 3.

도 6은 본 개시에 적용되는 예시 1로, intra-CU 시나리오에서 L1/L2 기반의 핸드오버를 위한 주변 셀들에 대한 설정에 대해, 효과적인 RRC 설정 업데이트를 제공하기 위한 제 1 LTM 후보 셀 RRC 설정 방법 및 절차를 도시한 도면이다. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a first LTM candidate cell RRC configuration method and procedure for providing effective RRC configuration update for configuration of surrounding cells for L1/L2 based handover in an intra-CU scenario, as an example 1 applied to the present disclosure.

RRC 연결 상태의 단말(1f-01)은 소스 셀 1(DU 1, 1f-02)과 데이터 송수신을 수행하다가 1f-10 단계에서 설정된 레이어 3 측정 및 보고에 따라 서빙 셀 및 주변 셀들에 대한 측정값을 소스 셀 1(DU 1, 1f-02)에 전달한다. 이때 실제 측정 값은 기지국의 CU(1f-03)에게 전달된다. 이는 기지국 CU(1f-03)에서 RRC 메시지 처리를 담당하고, mobility를 결정하기 때문이다. The terminal (1f-01) in the RRC connection state performs data transmission and reception with the source cell 1 (DU 1, 1f-02), and transmits the measurement values for the serving cell and surrounding cells to the source cell 1 (DU 1, 1f-02) according to the layer 3 measurement and reporting set in step 1f-10. At this time, the actual measurement values are transmitted to the CU (1f-03) of the base station. This is because the base station CU (1f-03) is responsible for RRC message processing and determines mobility.

기지국 CU(1f-03)는 단말(1f-01)로부터 전달된 측정값 보고에 따라 주변 셀들(DU 2, 1f-04; DU M, 1f-05)에게 1f-15 단계에서 L1/L2 기반의 핸드오버를 위한 설정 정보를 요청하는 메시지(L1/L2 config request message)를 생성해서 F1 인터페이스로 전달한다. 도면에서 후보 셀을 DU와 연계해서 표기하였지만, 실제로는 후보 셀과 DU가 1:1 매핑이거나 복수의 후보 셀이 하나의 DU에 포함될 수도 있다. 또한 상기의 L1/L2 기반의 핸드오버를 위한 설정 정보를 요청하는 메시지는 기존의 핸드오버 요청 메시지, UE context 요청 메시지, UE context 수정 요청 메시지 등 일수도 있고, 새로운 F1 혹은 Xn 메시지일 수 있다. 상기 L1/L2 기반의 핸드오버를 위한 설정 정보를 요청하는 메시지에는 주변 셀들에게 L1/L2 기반의 핸드오버 후보 셀로 결정된 것을 요청함과 동시에, 해당 셀로 L1/L2 기반의 핸드오버가 수행될 때 적용되는 RRC 설정 정보를 요청한다. The base station CU (1f-03) generates a message (L1/L2 config request message) requesting configuration information for L1/L2-based handover to the surrounding cells (DU 2, 1f-04; DU M, 1f-05) at step 1f-15 based on the measurement value report transmitted from the terminal (1f-01) and transmits the message to the F1 interface. In the drawing, the candidate cell is shown in connection with the DU, but in reality, the candidate cell and the DU may be mapped 1:1 or multiple candidate cells may be included in one DU. In addition, the message requesting configuration information for the above L1/L2-based handover may be an existing handover request message, a UE context request message, a UE context modification request message, etc., or a new F1 or Xn message. The message requesting configuration information for the above L1/L2-based handover requests neighboring cells to be determined as candidate cells for L1/L2-based handover, and at the same time requests RRC configuration information that is applied when L1/L2-based handover is performed to the corresponding cell.

상기에서도 설명하였듯이, L1/L2 기반의 핸드오버가 수행될 때 적용되는 RRC 설정 정보는 셀 레벨, 셀 그룹 레벨, RRC 메시지 레벨의 구조 중 하나를 가질 수 있다. 또한, 상기의 L1/L2 기반의 핸드오버를 위한 설정 정보를 요청하는 메시지는 기준 셀에 대한 정보 및 설정이 동시에 전달될 수 있다. 해당 기준 셀에 대한 설정 정보가 L1/L2 기반의 핸드오버를 위한 설정 정보를 요청하는 메시지에 같이 전달될 수 있다. 또한, 상기 메시지에는 후보 주변 셀들(1f-04, 1f-05)에게 L1/L2 기반의 핸드오버를 위한 설정 정보를 delta configuration을 적용하여 전달해달라는 지시자가 포함될 수도 있다. 상기 지시자는 각 셀 별로 요청되거나 모든 셀들에게 공통적으로 요청될 수도 있다. As described above, the RRC configuration information applied when L1/L2-based handover is performed can have one of the structures of cell level, cell group level, and RRC message level. In addition, a message requesting configuration information for the L1/L2-based handover can simultaneously transmit information and configuration for a reference cell. The configuration information for the reference cell can be transmitted together with the message requesting configuration information for L1/L2-based handover. In addition, the message may include an instruction requesting that the configuration information for L1/L2-based handover be transmitted to candidate neighboring cells (1f-04, 1f-05) by applying delta configuration. The instruction may be requested for each cell or may be commonly requested for all cells.

1f-20 단계에서 L1/L2 기반의 핸드오버를 위한 설정 정보를 요청하는 메시지를 수신한 후보 주변 셀들(1f-04, 1f-05)은 전달된 기준 셀의 설정 정보를 기반으로 해서 L1/L2 기반의 핸드오버가 적용되었을 때의 각 후보 주변 셀들의 설정 정보를 delta configuration 기반으로 생성한다. 이후 1f-25 단계에서 각 후보 주변 셀들(1f-04, 1f-05)은 생성된 L1/L2 기반의 핸드오버를 위한 설정 정보를 L1/L2 기반의 핸드오버를 위한 설정 정보 응답 메시지 (L1/L2 config response message)에 수납하여 기지국 CU(1f-03)에게 전달한다. 상기 단계에서 LTM 후보 셀들에 대한 설정 정보는 셀 설정 및 셀 그룹 설정(CellGroupConfig)에 해당한다. 또한 상기 단계에서 각 LTM 후보 셀들(1f-04, 1f-05)은 CU로부터의 delta configuration 요청에 대해 거부할 수도 있으며, 이 경우, full configuration을 적용하고 이를 지시하는 지시자를 포함하여 CU(1f-03)에게 전달할 수 있다.In step 1f-20, the candidate neighboring cells (1f-04, 1f-05) that have received a message requesting configuration information for L1/L2-based handover generate configuration information of each candidate neighboring cell based on delta configuration when L1/L2-based handover is applied based on the configuration information of the transmitted reference cell. Thereafter, in step 1f-25, each candidate neighboring cell (1f-04, 1f-05) stores the generated L1/L2-based handover configuration information in an L1/L2-based handover configuration information response message (L1/L2 config response message) and transfers it to the base station CU (1f-03). In the above step, the configuration information for the LTM candidate cells corresponds to cell configuration and cell group configuration (CellGroupConfig). Additionally, in the above step, each LTM candidate cell (1f-04, 1f-05) may reject the delta configuration request from the CU, in which case, it may apply the full configuration and transmit it to the CU (1f-03) including an instruction indicating it.

1f-30 단계에서 소스 셀(1f-02)은 기지국 CU(1f-03)가 생성한 RRC 메시지를 전달받아 단말(1f-01)에게 전달한다. 해당 RRC 메시지는 L1/L2 기반의 핸드오버가 적용되는 주변 후보 셀들에 대한 설정 정보(Pre-Config1,쪋Pre-ConfigN, 1f-31)를 수납한 메시지이며, 각 LTM 후보 셀들에 대한 설정 정보는 각 후보 셀들(DU로부터 수신한 셀 그룹 설정 (CellGroupConfig)에 CU에서 생성한 무선 베어러 설정(RadioBearerConfig), L3 측정 관련 설정(MeasConfig)을 포함하여 생성된 메시지일 수 있다. 이는 DU에서는 lower layer 설정인 셀 그룹 설정을 생성해서 CU에게 전달하지만, 무선 베어러 및 L3 측정 관련 설정은 CU에서 생성하기 때문에, 각 LTM 후보 셀들에 대한 설정 정보를 CU에서 최종적으로 컨테이너(Pre-Config)로 생성 및 관리하여 RRC 메시지를 통해 단말(1f-01)에게 전달한다. 이에 따라 각 LTM 후보 셀들에 대한 설정 정보(Pre-Config)에는 LTM 후보 셀들을 지칭할 수 있는 인덱스가 존재한다. 해당 인덱스는 실제 셀 인덱스이거나 논리적으로 새롭게 생성된 LTM 후보 셀의 설정을 지칭하는 인덱스일 수 있다. At step 1f-30, the source cell (1f-02) receives the RRC message generated by the base station CU (1f-03) and transmits it to the terminal (1f-01). The RRC message is a message that contains configuration information (Pre-Config1, 쪋Pre-ConfigN, 1f-31) for surrounding candidate cells to which L1/L2-based handover is applied, and the configuration information for each LTM candidate cell may be a message generated by including the radio bearer configuration (RadioBearerConfig) and L3 measurement related configuration (MeasConfig) generated by the CU in the cell group configuration (CellGroupConfig) received from the DU. This means that the DU generates the cell group configuration, which is a lower layer configuration, and transfers it to the CU, but the radio bearer and L3 measurement related configurations are generated by the CU. Therefore, the CU finally generates and manages the configuration information for each LTM candidate cell as a container (Pre-Config) and transfers it to the terminal (1f-01) through an RRC message. Accordingly, the configuration information (Pre-Config) for each LTM candidate cell has an index that can designate the LTM candidate cells. The index may be an actual cell index or an index that logically designates the configuration of a newly created LTM candidate cell.

1f-35 단계에서 해당 RRC 메시지를 수신한 단말(1f-01)은 RRC 메시지를 디코딩하고 프로세싱하는 절차를 수행한다. 상기 프로세싱에는 수신한 메시지의 ASN.1 디코딩 및 유효성 판정과 설정 내용을 저장 관리하는 방법 등이 포함된다.In step 1f-35, the terminal (1f-01) that receives the RRC message performs a procedure for decoding and processing the RRC message. The processing includes ASN.1 decoding and validity determination of the received message and a method for storing and managing the configuration contents.

기지국 및 각각의 LTM 후보 셀들은 상기 단계에서 전달된 LTM 후보 셀 설정 정보가 변경된 경우, 이를 업데이트 하는 절차를 수행한다. 본 개시의 예시들에서는 이와 같은 경우, LTM 후보 셀 설정 정보를 효과적으로 업데이트 하기 위한 LTM 후보 셀 RRC 설정의 구조를 제안하고 전체 절차를 제안하는 것을 특징으로 한다. 즉, LTM 후보 셀 RRC 설정의 세부 설정 중, 서빙 셀 및 셀 그룹 설정(CellGroupConfig) 혹은 무선 베어러 설정 (RadioBearerConfig) 혹은 레이어3 측정 관련 설정(MeasConfig) 중 적어도 한 개 이상의 설정은 변경될 수 있다. The base station and each LTM candidate cell perform a procedure for updating the LTM candidate cell configuration information transmitted in the above step, if it has changed. The examples of the present disclosure are characterized by proposing a structure of an LTM candidate cell RRC configuration for effectively updating the LTM candidate cell configuration information in such a case and proposing an overall procedure. That is, among the detailed settings of the LTM candidate cell RRC configuration, at least one of the serving cell and cell group configuration (CellGroupConfig), the radio bearer configuration (RadioBearerConfig), or the layer 3 measurement related configuration (MeasConfig) can be changed.

1f-40 단계에서는, LTM 후보 셀 1에서 무선 베어러 설정(RadioBearerConfig)의 변경이 필요한 경우, 기지국의 CU(1f-03)는, 해당 셀에 대한 무선 베어러 설정(RadioBearerConfig1, 1f-42) 변경을 생성하여 해당 LTM 후보 셀 설정 컨테이너(Pre-Config1, 1f-41)에 포함하여 단말(1f-01)에게 RRC 메시지를 전달한다. 여기서 Pre-Config1(1f-41)에는 업데이트 되는 RadioBearerConfig 설정 정보(1f-42)와 LTM 후보 셀에 대한 설정을 지시하는 인덱스가 포함되며, LTM 후보 셀 설정 정보의 다른 정보(CellGroupConfig, MeasConfig)들은 생략될 수 있다. 또한, 상기 RadioBearerConfig는 delta configuration이 적용될 수 있다. In step 1f-40, if a change in radio bearer configuration (RadioBearerConfig) is required in LTM candidate cell 1, the CU (1f-03) of the base station generates a change in radio bearer configuration (RadioBearerConfig1, 1f-42) for the corresponding cell, includes it in the corresponding LTM candidate cell configuration container (Pre-Config1, 1f-41), and transmits an RRC message to the terminal (1f-01). Here, Pre-Config1 (1f-41) includes updated RadioBearerConfig configuration information (1f-42) and an index indicating the configuration for the LTM candidate cell, and other information (CellGroupConfig, MeasConfig) of the LTM candidate cell configuration information may be omitted. In addition, the RadioBearerConfig may have a delta configuration applied.

1f-45 단계에서는 LTM 후보 셀 1에서 L3 측정관련 설정(MeasConfig)의 변경이 필요한 경우, 기지국의 CU(1f-03)는, 해당 셀에 대한 L3 측정관련 설정(MeasConfig1, 1f-47) 변경을 생성하여 해당 LTM 후보 셀 설정 컨테이너(Pre-Config1, 1f-46)에 포함하여 단말에게 RRC 메시지를 통해 전달한다. 여기서 Pre-Config1(1f-46)에는 업데이트 되는 L3 측정관련 설정 (MeasConfig1, 1f-47) 정보와 LTM 후보 셀에 대한 설정을 지시하는 인덱스가 포함되며, LTM 후보 셀 설정 정보의 다른 정보(CellGroupConfig, RadioBearerConfig)들은 생략될 수 있다. 또한, 상기 MeasConfig는 delta configuration이 적용될 수 있다. In step 1f-45, if a change in L3 measurement-related configuration (MeasConfig) is required in LTM candidate cell 1, the CU (1f-03) of the base station generates a change in L3 measurement-related configuration (MeasConfig1, 1f-47) for the corresponding cell, includes it in the corresponding LTM candidate cell configuration container (Pre-Config1, 1f-46), and transmits it to the terminal through an RRC message. Here, Pre-Config1 (1f-46) includes information on the L3 measurement-related configuration (MeasConfig1, 1f-47) to be updated and an index indicating the configuration for the LTM candidate cell, and other information (CellGroupConfig, RadioBearerConfig) of the LTM candidate cell configuration information may be omitted. In addition, the MeasConfig may have a delta configuration applied.

상기 LTM 후보 셀에 대한 RadioBearerConfig와 MeasConfig의 변경 절차(기지국의 CU(1f-03)에서 설정 변경 동작 수행)와는 달리 CellGroupConfig에 대한 설정 변경이 필요한 경우, 각 LTM 후보 셀들(DU 2, 1f-04; DU M, 1f-05)에서 설정 변경을 요청하고 변경된 설정을 기지국의 CU(1f-03)에게 전달하도록 하는 동작이 필요하다. 즉, 1f-50 단계에서 LTM 후보 셀 1은 CellGroupConfig1에 대한 설정 변경을 요청하는 메시지를 F1 인터페이스로 기지국의 CU(1f-03)에게 전달한다. Unlike the procedure for changing RadioBearerConfig and MeasConfig for the above LTM candidate cells (performing a configuration change operation in the CU (1f-03) of the base station), when a configuration change for CellGroupConfig is required, an operation is required to request a configuration change in each LTM candidate cell (DU 2, 1f-04; DU M, 1f-05) and transmit the changed configuration to the CU (1f-03) of the base station. That is, in step 1f-50, LTM candidate cell 1 transmits a message requesting a configuration change for CellGroupConfig1 to the CU (1f-03) of the base station through the F1 interface.

1f-55 단계에서는 기지국의 CU(1f-03)은, LTM 후보 셀 1(DU 2, 1f-04)에서 전달된 CellGroupConfig1(1f-57)을 적용하여, 해당 LTM 후보 셀 설정 컨테이너(Pre-Config1, 1f-56)에 포함하여 단말에게 RRC 메시지를 전달한다. 여기서 Pre-Config1(1f-56)에는 업데이트 되는 CellGroupConfig1 설정 정보와 LTM 후보 셀에 대한 설정을 지시하는 인덱스가 포함되며, LTM 후보 셀 설정 정보의 다른 정보(RadioBearerConfig, MeasConfig)들은 생략될 수 있다. 또한, 상기 CellGroupConfig1는 delta configuration이 적용될 수 있다. In step 1f-55, the CU (1f-03) of the base station applies CellGroupConfig1 (1f-57) transmitted from LTM candidate cell 1 (DU 2, 1f-04), includes it in the corresponding LTM candidate cell configuration container (Pre-Config1, 1f-56), and transmits an RRC message to the terminal. Here, Pre-Config1 (1f-56) includes updated CellGroupConfig1 configuration information and an index indicating configuration for the LTM candidate cell, and other information (RadioBearerConfig, MeasConfig) of the LTM candidate cell configuration information may be omitted. In addition, delta configuration may be applied to the CellGroupConfig1.

1f-60 단계에서 단말(1f-01)은, 각 후보 주변 셀들에 대한 L1 측정 및 보고를 수행하게 되고, 이를 수신한 소스 셀은 핸드오버 결정을 하여, 1f-65 단계에서 단말(1f-01)에게 L1/L2 핸드오버를 지시한다. 상기 단계에서 핸드오버 지시자를 포함하는 L1/L2 시그널링으로는 MAC CE 및 DCI가 사용될 수 있다. 상기의 1f-60 단계 및 1f-65 단계의 L1/L2 핸드오버를 결정하기 위한 L1 측정값을 수신하고 핸드오버를 결정하는 것은 소스 셀(DU, 1f-02) 혹은 소스 기지국 (CU, 1f-03)일 수 있다. 만약, 기지국(CU, 1f-03)가 모든 결정을 할 경우, 소스 셀(DU, 1f-02)은 단말(1f-01)로부터 수신한 L1 측정값을 기지국(CU, 1f-03)으로 전달하고, 기지국 (CU, 1f-03)의 핸드오버 결정 지시에 따라 L1/L2 시그널링을 단말(1f-01)에게 전달한다. 하지만, 소스 셀(DU, 1f-02)이 최종 결정을 할 경우, L1 측정값을 기지국(CU, 1f-03)에게 전달하지 않고, 이전 기지국으로부터 수신한 각 후보 주변 셀들에 대한 핸드오버 결정을 내리기 위한 측정값 기준(임계값 및 측정값 범위)에 따라 핸드오버를 스스로 결정하고, 이에 따라 L1/L2 시그널링을 단말(1f-01)에게 전달한다. In step 1f-60, the terminal (1f-01) performs L1 measurement and reporting for each candidate surrounding cell, and the source cell that receives the measurement and reports makes a handover decision and instructs the terminal (1f-01) to perform L1/L2 handover in step 1f-65. In the above step, MAC CE and DCI can be used as L1/L2 signaling including a handover indicator. The source cell (DU, 1f-02) or the source base station (CU, 1f-03) can receive the L1 measurement values for determining the L1/L2 handover in steps 1f-60 and 1f-65 and determine the handover. If the base station (CU, 1f-03) makes all decisions, the source cell (DU, 1f-02) transfers the L1 measurement value received from the terminal (1f-01) to the base station (CU, 1f-03) and transfers L1/L2 signaling to the terminal (1f-01) according to the handover decision instruction of the base station (CU, 1f-03). However, if the source cell (DU, 1f-02) makes the final decision, it does not transfer the L1 measurement value to the base station (CU, 1f-03), but decides the handover on its own according to the measurement value criteria (threshold value and measurement value range) for making the handover decision for each candidate neighboring cell received from the previous base station, and transfers L1/L2 signaling to the terminal (1f-01) accordingly.

L1/L2 핸드오버 지시가 단말에게 전달되면, 단말(1f-01)은 1f-70 단계에서 핸드오버 절차를 시작하고, L1/L2 핸드오버를 위한 타이머를 구동한다. 상기 타이머는 LTM을 위해 새롭게 설정된 타이머일 수 있으며, 혹은 기존 핸드오버에 사용되는 T304 타이머를 재사용할 수도 있다. 또한, 단말(1f-01)은 L1/L2 핸드오버가 적용되는 타겟 셀에 대한 설정을 적용한다. 이는 1f-30/1f-40/1f-45/1f-55 단계에서 미리 수신한 주변 셀 설정 중 하나이다. When the L1/L2 handover instruction is transmitted to the terminal, the terminal (1f-01) starts a handover procedure in step 1f-70 and starts a timer for L1/L2 handover. The timer may be a newly set timer for LTM, or may reuse a T304 timer used for an existing handover. In addition, the terminal (1f-01) applies a setting for a target cell to which L1/L2 handover is applied. This is one of the neighboring cell settings received in advance in steps 1f-30/1f-40/1f-45/1f-55.

1f-75 단계에서 적용되는 설정에 따라 단말(1f-01)은 해당 타겟 셀에 대해 랜덤 액세스가 필요한 경우 랜덤 액세스를 수행하고, 랜덤 액세스가 지시되지 않거나 필요하지 않은 경우 (상향링크 동기가 이미 수행되거나 맞춰져 있는 경우)에는 랜덤 액세스 절차를 생략한다. Depending on the settings applied in step 1f-75, the terminal (1f-01) performs random access when random access is required for the target cell, and skips the random access procedure when random access is not indicated or required (when uplink synchronization has already been performed or aligned).

1f-80 단계에서 단말(1f-01)은 타겟 셀과 핸드오버 완료 절차를 수행한다. 해당 절차는 핸드오버 완료 지시를 하는 방법에 따라 달라질 수 있으며, 타겟 셀의 설정을 RRC 메시지 레벨로 수신한 경우 RRCReconfiugrationComplete 메시지를 전달하는 과정일수 있으나, 셀 레벨 혹은 셀 그룹 레벨의 설정을 수신한 경우에는 새로운 핸드오버 완료 지시 메시지(새로운 RRC 메시지 혹은 MAC CE)가 해당 절차를 대신할 수 있다.In step 1f-80, the terminal (1f-01) performs a handover completion procedure with the target cell. The procedure may vary depending on the method of indicating the handover completion, and may be a process of transmitting an RRCReconfiugrationComplete message if the target cell configuration is received at the RRC message level, but if the cell level or cell group level configuration is received, a new handover completion indication message (new RRC message or MAC CE) may replace the procedure.

1f-85 단계에서 LTM이 완료된 이후 타겟 셀(DU2, 1f-04)은 기지국 (CU, 1f-03)에게 LTM 절차가 완료되어 단말(1f-01)이 해당 셀에 성공적으로 RRC 연결을 수행하였음을 알린다. 이후 기지국(CU, 1f-03)은 소스 셀(1f-02)에 해당 단말(1f-01)에 대한 연결을 종료할 것을 지시하고, UE context를 release 할 것을 지시한다.After LTM is completed at step 1f-85, the target cell (DU2, 1f-04) informs the base station (CU, 1f-03) that the LTM procedure is completed and the terminal (1f-01) has successfully performed RRC connection to the corresponding cell. Thereafter, the base station (CU, 1f-03) instructs the source cell (1f-02) to terminate the connection to the terminal (1f-01) and to release the UE context.

도면에서는 생략되어 있지만, 기준 셀 및 기준 셀의 설정의 변경이 필요한 경우, 기지국 CU와 주변 셀들 사이의 F1 인터페이스 메시지들로 설정 관련 동작이 업데이트될 수 있다. 특히 기준 셀의 설정이 변경되는 경우, 앞서 설명한 LTM 후보 셀 설정 절차가 반복되어 기준 셀 설정 변경 및 LTM 후보 셀 설정 변경 절차가 수행되고, 단말에게 변경된 설정 정보가 전달된다. 또한, 본 도면에서는 생략되었지만, L1/L2 기반의 핸드오버가 적용되는 주변 후보 셀들을 동적으로 지시하기 위한 새로운 MAC CE 및 DCI가 도입되어, 동적으로 유효한 설정이 지시 혹은 설정 해제(미리 전달한 L1/L2 기반 핸드오버 설정 release)될 수도 있다. 혹은 상술한 관련 동작은 기지국이 내부적으로 수행하고 단말에게 별도의 시그널링을 전달하지 않을 수 있다.Although omitted in the drawing, when a change in a reference cell and its configuration is required, configuration-related operations may be updated with F1 interface messages between the base station CU and neighboring cells. In particular, when the configuration of the reference cell is changed, the LTM candidate cell configuration procedure described above is repeated to perform the reference cell configuration change and LTM candidate cell configuration change procedures, and the changed configuration information is transmitted to the terminal. In addition, although omitted in the drawing, new MAC CE and DCI may be introduced to dynamically indicate neighboring candidate cells to which L1/L2-based handover is applied, so that dynamically valid configurations may be indicated or released (previously transmitted L1/L2-based handover configurations may be released). Alternatively, the above-described related operations may be performed internally by the base station without transmitting separate signaling to the terminal.

도 7은 본 개시에 적용되는 예시 2로써, intra-CU 시나리오에서 L1/L2 기반의 핸드오버를 위한 주변 셀들에 대한 설정에 대해, 효과적인 RRC 설정 업데이트를 제공하기 위한 제 2 LTM 후보 셀 RRC 설정 방법 및 절차를 도시한 도면이다. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a second LTM candidate cell RRC configuration method and procedure for providing effective RRC configuration update for configuration of surrounding cells for L1/L2 based handover in an intra-CU scenario, as Example 2 applied to the present disclosure.

RRC 연결 상태의 단말(1g-01)은 소스 셀 1(DU 1, 1g-02)과 데이터 송수신을 수행하다가 1g-10 단계에서 설정된 레이어 3 측정 및 보고에 따라 서빙 셀 및 주변 셀들에 대한 측정값을 소스 셀 1(DU 1, 1g-02)에 전달한다. 이때 실제 측정 값은 기지국의 CU(1g-03)에게 전달된다. 이는 기지국 CU(1g-03)에서 RRC 메시지 처리를 담당하고, mobility를 결정하기 때문이다. The terminal (1g-01) in the RRC connection state performs data transmission and reception with the source cell 1 (DU 1, 1g-02), and transmits the measurement values for the serving cell and surrounding cells to the source cell 1 (DU 1, 1g-02) according to the layer 3 measurement and reporting set in step 1g-10. At this time, the actual measurement values are transmitted to the CU (1g-03) of the base station. This is because the base station CU (1g-03) is responsible for RRC message processing and determines mobility.

기지국 CU(1g-03)는 단말(1g-01)로부터 전달된 측정값 보고에 따라 주변 셀들(DU 2, 1g-04; DU M, 1g-05)에게 1g-15 단계에서 L1/L2 기반의 핸드오버를 위한 설정 정보를 요청하는 메시지(L1/L2 config request message)를 생성해서 F1 인터페이스로 전달한다. 도면에서 후보 셀을 DU와 연계해서 표기하였지만, 실제로는 후보 셀과 DU가 1:1 매핑이거나 복수의 후보 셀이 하나의 DU에 포함될 수도 있다. 또한 상기의 L1/L2 기반의 핸드오버를 위한 설정 정보를 요청하는 메시지는 기존의 핸드오버 요청 메시지, UE context 요청 메시지, UE context 수정 요청 메시지 등 일수도 있고, 새로운 F1 혹은 Xn 메시지일 수 있다. 상기 L1/L2 기반의 핸드오버를 위한 설정 정보를 요청하는 메시지에는 주변 셀들에게 L1/L2 기반의 핸드오버 후보 셀로 결정된 것을 요청함과 동시에, 해당 셀로 L1/L2 기반의 핸드오버가 수행될 때 적용되는 RRC 설정 정보를 요청한다. 상기에서도 설명하였듯이, L1/L2 기반의 핸드오버가 수행될 때 적용되는 RRC 설정 정보는 셀 레벨, 셀 그룹 레벨, RRC 메시지 레벨의 구조 중 하나를 가질 수 있다. 또한, 상기의 L1/L2 기반의 핸드오버를 위한 설정 정보를 요청하는 메시지는 기준 셀에 대한 정보 및 설정이 동시에 전달될 수 있다 해당 기준 셀에 대한 설정 정보가 L1/L2 기반의 핸드오버를 위한 설정 정보를 요청하는 메시지에 같이 전달될 수 있다. 또한, 상기 메시지에는 후보 주변 셀들(1g-04, 1g-05)에게 L1/L2 기반의 핸드오버를 위한 설정 정보를 delta configuration을 적용하여 전달해달라는 지시자가 포함될 수도 있다. 상기 지시자는 각 셀 별로 요청되거나 모든 셀들에게 공통적으로 요청될 수도 있다. The base station CU (1g-03) generates a message (L1/L2 config request message) requesting configuration information for L1/L2-based handover at step 1g-15 to surrounding cells (DU 2, 1g-04; DU M, 1g-05) based on the measurement value report transmitted from the terminal (1g-01) and transmits the message to the F1 interface. In the drawing, the candidate cell is shown in connection with the DU, but in reality, the candidate cell and the DU may be mapped 1:1 or multiple candidate cells may be included in one DU. In addition, the message requesting configuration information for the above L1/L2-based handover may be an existing handover request message, a UE context request message, a UE context modification request message, etc., or a new F1 or Xn message. The message requesting the configuration information for the L1/L2-based handover requests neighboring cells to be determined as candidate cells for the L1/L2-based handover, and at the same time requests RRC configuration information to be applied when the L1/L2-based handover is performed to the corresponding cell. As described above, the RRC configuration information to be applied when the L1/L2-based handover is performed may have one of the structures of a cell level, a cell group level, and an RRC message level. In addition, the message requesting the configuration information for the L1/L2-based handover may simultaneously transmit information and configuration for a reference cell. The configuration information for the reference cell may be transmitted together with the message requesting the configuration information for the L1/L2-based handover. In addition, the message may include an instruction to transmit the configuration information for the L1/L2-based handover to the candidate neighboring cells (1g-04, 1g-05) by applying a delta configuration. The instruction may be requested for each cell or may be commonly requested for all cells.

1g-20 단계에서 L1/L2 기반의 핸드오버를 위한 설정 정보를 요청하는 메시지를 수신한 후보 주변 셀들(1g-04, 1g-05)은 전달된 기준 셀의 설정 정보를 기반으로 해서 L1/L2 기반의 핸드오버가 적용되었을 때의 각 후보 주변 셀들의 설정 정보를 delta configuration 기반으로 생성한다. 이후 1g-25 단계에서 각 후보 주변 셀들(1g-04, 1g-05)은 생성된 L1/L2 기반의 핸드오버를 위한 설정 정보를 L1/L2 기반의 핸드오버를 위한 설정 정보 응답 메시지(L1/L2 config response message)에 수납하여 기지국 CU(1g-03)에게 전달한다. 상기 단계에서 LTM 후보 셀들에 대한 설정 정보는 셀 설정 및 셀 그룹 설정(CellGroupConfig)에 해당한다. 또한 상기 단계에서 각 LTM 후보 셀들(1g-04, 1g-05)은 CU로부터의 delta configuration 요청에 대해 거부할 수도 있으며, 이 경우, full configuration을 적용하고 이를 지시하는 지시자를 포함하여 CU에게 전달할 수 있다.In step 1g-20, the candidate neighboring cells (1g-04, 1g-05) that have received a message requesting configuration information for L1/L2-based handover generate configuration information of each candidate neighboring cell based on delta configuration when L1/L2-based handover is applied based on the configuration information of the transmitted reference cell. Thereafter, in step 1g-25, each candidate neighboring cell (1g-04, 1g-05) stores the generated L1/L2-based handover configuration information in an L1/L2-based handover configuration information response message (L1/L2 config response message) and transfers it to the base station CU (1g-03). In the above step, the configuration information for the LTM candidate cells corresponds to cell configuration and cell group configuration (CellGroupConfig). Additionally, in the above step, each LTM candidate cell (1g-04, 1g-05) may reject a delta configuration request from the CU, in which case, it may apply the full configuration and transmit it to the CU along with an instruction indicating the same.

1g-30 단계에서 소스 셀(1g-02)은, 기지국 CU(1g-03)가 생성한 RRC 메시지를 전달받아 단말(1g-01)에게 전달한다. 해당 RRC 메시지는 L1/L2 기반의 핸드오버가 적용되는 주변 후보 셀들에 대한 설정 정보로, 각 후보 셀들(DU)로부터 수신한 셀 그룹 설정(CellGroupConfig)들이 포함된 리스트(List of CellGroupConfig, 1g-31)와 후보 셀들에 적용되는 CU에서 생성한 무선 베어러 설정(RadioBearerConfig)의 리스트(List of RadioBearerConfig, 1g-32), 후보 셀들에 적용되는 CU에서 생성한 L3 측정 관련 설정(MeasConfig)의 리스트(List of MeasConfig, 1g-33)로 구성되어 생성된 메시지일 수 있다. 이는 DU에서는 lower layer 설정인 셀 그룹 설정을 생성해서 CU에게 전달하지만 무선 베어러 및 L3 측정 관련 설정은 CU에서 생성하기 때문에, 각 LTM 후보 셀들에 대한 설정 정보를 생성 및 관리 할 때, CU에서 최종적으로 각 정보를 별도로 관리하는 것이 더 효율적일 수 있기 때문이다. 이에 따라 각 LTM 후보 셀들에 대한 설정 정보 리스트(1g-31, 1g-32, 1g-33)에는 LTM 후보 셀들을 지칭할 수 있는 인덱스가 존재한다. 해당 인덱스는 실제 셀 인덱스이거나 논리적으로 새롭게 생성된 LTM 후보 셀의 설정을 지칭하는 인덱스일 수 있다. In step 1g-30, the source cell (1g-02) receives an RRC message generated by the base station CU (1g-03) and transmits it to the terminal (1g-01). The RRC message is configuration information for surrounding candidate cells to which L1/L2-based handover is applied, and may be a message generated by including a list (List of CellGroupConfig, 1g-31) containing cell group configurations (CellGroupConfig) received from each candidate cell (DU), a list (List of RadioBearerConfig, 1g-32) of radio bearer configurations (RadioBearerConfig) generated by the CU applied to the candidate cells, and a list (List of MeasConfig, 1g-33) of L3 measurement-related configurations (MeasConfig) generated by the CU applied to the candidate cells. This is because, although the DU creates the cell group configuration, which is a lower layer configuration, and transfers it to the CU, the radio bearer and L3 measurement-related configurations are created in the CU. Therefore, when creating and managing configuration information for each LTM candidate cell, it may be more efficient for the CU to ultimately manage each piece of information separately. Accordingly, in the configuration information list (1g-31, 1g-32, 1g-33) for each LTM candidate cell, there is an index that can designate the LTM candidate cells. The index may be an actual cell index or an index that logically designates the configuration of a newly created LTM candidate cell.

1g-35 단계에서 해당 RRC 메시지를 수신한 단말(1g-01)은, RRC 메시지를 디코딩하고 프로세싱하는 절차를 수행한다. 상기 프로세싱에는 수신한 메시지의 ASN.1 디코딩 및 유효성 판정과 설정 내용을 저장 관리하는 방법 등이 포함된다. LTM 후보 셀들에 대한 셀 그룹 설정(CellGroupConfig)들이 포함된 리스트는 LTM 후보 셀들을 지칭할 수 있는 인덱스가 포함된다. 또한, 무선 베어러 설정(RadioBearerConfig)의 리스트와 L3 측정 관련 설정(MeasConfig)의 리스트에는, 리스트 내의 각 설정들이 어떤 LTM 후보 셀들에 적용되는지를 지시할 수 있는 후보 셀 지시 인덱스 혹은 비트맵 정보가 포함될 수 있다. 이는 CU에서 생성하는 상기 무선 베어러 설정과 L3 측정 관련 설정은 복수의 LTM 후보 셀들에게도 적용될 수 있기 때문에 예시 1에서의 구조보다 시그널링 오버헤드를 줄일 수 있는 장점이 있다.In step 1g-35, the terminal (1g-01) that receives the RRC message performs a procedure for decoding and processing the RRC message. The processing includes ASN.1 decoding and validity determination of the received message, and a method for storing and managing configuration contents. A list including cell group configurations (CellGroupConfig) for LTM candidate cells includes an index that can designate LTM candidate cells. In addition, the list of radio bearer configurations (RadioBearerConfig) and the list of L3 measurement related configurations (MeasConfig) can include candidate cell indication index or bitmap information that can designate which LTM candidate cells each configuration in the list is applied to. This has an advantage of reducing signaling overhead compared to the structure in Example 1 because the radio bearer configuration and L3 measurement related configuration generated by the CU can be applied to a plurality of LTM candidate cells.

기지국 및 각각의 LTM 후보 셀들은 상기 단계에서 전달된 LTM 후보 셀 설정 정보가 변경된 경우, 이를 업데이트 하는 절차를 수행한다. 본 개시의 예시들에서는 이와 같은 경우, LTM 후보 셀 설정 정보를 효과적으로 업데이트 하기 위한 LTM 후보 셀 RRC 설정의 구조를 제안하고 전체 절차를 제안하는 것을 특징으로 한다. 즉, LTM 후보 셀 RRC 설정의 세부 설정 중, 서빙 셀 및 셀 그룹 설정(CellGroupConfig) 혹은 무선 베어러 설정 (RadioBearerConfig) 혹은 레이어3 측정 관련 설정(MeasConfig) 중 적어도 한 개 이상의 설정이 변경될 수 있다. The base station and each LTM candidate cell perform a procedure for updating the LTM candidate cell configuration information transmitted in the above step, if it has changed. In the examples of the present disclosure, in such a case, a structure of an LTM candidate cell RRC configuration for effectively updating the LTM candidate cell configuration information is proposed, and the overall procedure is proposed. That is, among the detailed settings of the LTM candidate cell RRC configuration, at least one of the serving cell and cell group configuration (CellGroupConfig), the radio bearer configuration (RadioBearerConfig), or the layer 3 measurement related configuration (MeasConfig) may be changed.

1g-40 단계에서는 LTM 후보 셀 1에서 무선 베어러 설정(RadioBearerConfig)의 변경이 필요한 경우, 기지국의 CU(1g-03)는, 해당 셀에 대한 무선 베어러 설정(RadioBearerConfig1, 1g-41) 변경을 생성하여 후보 LTM 설정 정보에 포함하여, 단말에게 RRC 메시지를 통해 전달한다. 여기서 RadioBearerConfig1 설정 정보(1g-41)에는 해당 설정 정보가 어떤 LTM 후보 셀에 대한 설정을 지시하는지를 나타내는 인덱스가 포함된다. 또한, 상기 RadioBearerConfig는 delta configuration이 적용될 수 있다. 일 예로 하나의 RadioBearerConfig1 변경을 예시로 하였지만, 해당 단계에서 복수의 RadioBearerConfig가 포함된 리스트가 생성되어, 단말에게 전달될 수 있다.In step 1g-40, if a change in radio bearer configuration (RadioBearerConfig) is required in LTM candidate cell 1, the CU (1g-03) of the base station generates a change in radio bearer configuration (RadioBearerConfig1, 1g-41) for the corresponding cell, includes it in the candidate LTM configuration information, and transmits it to the terminal via an RRC message. Here, the RadioBearerConfig1 configuration information (1g-41) includes an index indicating which LTM candidate cell the corresponding configuration information indicates the configuration for. In addition, the RadioBearerConfig can have a delta configuration applied. As an example, a change in one RadioBearerConfig1 is described as an example, but a list including multiple RadioBearerConfigs can be generated and transmitted to the terminal in the corresponding step.

1g-45 단계에서는 LTM 후보 셀 1에서 L3 측정관련 설정(MeasConfig)의 변경이 필요한 경우, 기지국의 CU(1g-03)는 해당 셀에 대한 L3 측정관련 설정(MeasConfig1, 1g-46) 변경을 생성하여 LTM 설정 정보에 포함하여 단말(1g-01)에게 RRC 메시지를 통해 전달한다. 여기서 MeasConfig1 설정 정보(1g-46)에는 해당 설정 정보가 어떤 LTM 후보 셀에 대한 설정을 지시하는지를 나타내는 인덱스가 포함된다. 또한, 상기 MeasConfig는 delta configuration이 적용될 수 있다. 일 예로 하나의 MeasConfig1 변경을 예시로 하였지만, 해당 단계에서 복수의 MeasConfig가 포함된 리스트가 생성되어 단말에게 전달될 수 있다.In step 1g-45, if a change in L3 measurement-related settings (MeasConfig) is required in LTM candidate cell 1, the CU (1g-03) of the base station generates a change in L3 measurement-related settings (MeasConfig1, 1g-46) for the corresponding cell, includes it in the LTM configuration information, and transmits it to the terminal (1g-01) via an RRC message. Here, the MeasConfig1 configuration information (1g-46) includes an index indicating which LTM candidate cell the corresponding configuration information indicates the configuration for. In addition, the MeasConfig can have delta configuration applied. As an example, a single MeasConfig1 change is described as an example, but a list including multiple MeasConfigs can be generated and transmitted to the terminal in the corresponding step.

상기 LTM 후보 셀에 대한 RadioBearerConfig와 MeasConfig의 변경 절차(기지국의 CU(1g-03)에서 설정 변경 동작 수행)와는 달리 CellGroupConfig에 대한 설정 변경이 필요한 경우, 각 LTM 후보 셀들(DU 2, 1g-04; DU M, 1g-05)에서 설정 변경을 요청하고 변경된 설정을 기지국의 CU(1g-03)에게 전달하도록 하는 동작이 필요하다. 이를 위하여, 1g-50 단계에서 LTM 후보 셀 1(1g-04)은 CellGroupConfig1에 대한 설정 변경을 요청하는 메시지를 F1 인터페이스로 기지국의 CU(1g-03)에게 전달한다. 기지국의 CU(1g-03)는, 1g-55 단계에서, LTM 후보 셀 1(DU 2, 1g-04)로부터 전달된 CellGroupConfig1(1g-56)을 포함하는 LTM 후보 셀 설정을 단말(1g-01)에게 RRC 메시지를 통하여 전달한다. 여기서 CellGroupConfig1 설정 정보(1g-56)에는 해당 설정 정보가 어떤 LTM 후보 셀에 대한 설정을 지시하는지를 나타내는 인덱스가 포함된다. 또한, 상기 CellGroupConfig는 delta configuration이 적용될 수 있다. 일 예로 하나의 CellGroupConfig1 변경을 예시로 하였지만, 해당 단계에서 복수의 CellGroupConfig가 포함된 리스트가 생성되어 단말(1g-01)에게 전달될 수 있다.Unlike the procedure for changing RadioBearerConfig and MeasConfig for the above LTM candidate cells (performing a configuration change operation at the CU (1g-03) of the base station), when a configuration change is required for CellGroupConfig, an operation is required to request a configuration change at each LTM candidate cell (DU 2, 1g-04; DU M, 1g-05) and transmit the changed configuration to the CU (1g-03) of the base station. To this end, at step 1g-50, the LTM candidate cell 1 (1g-04) transmits a message requesting a configuration change for CellGroupConfig1 to the CU (1g-03) of the base station through the F1 interface. At step 1g-55, the CU (1g-03) of the base station transmits the LTM candidate cell configuration including CellGroupConfig1 (1g-56) transmitted from LTM candidate cell 1 (DU 2, 1g-04) to the terminal (1g-01) through an RRC message. Here, the CellGroupConfig1 configuration information (1g-56) includes an index indicating which LTM candidate cell the configuration information indicates. In addition, the CellGroupConfig can be applied with delta configuration. As an example, a single CellGroupConfig1 change is described, but a list including multiple CellGroupConfigs can be generated and transmitted to the terminal (1g-01) at the corresponding step.

1g-60 단계에서 단말(1g-01)은 각 후보 주변 셀들에 대한 L1 측정 및 보고를 수행하게 되고, 이 보고를 수신한 소스 셀은 핸드오버 결정을 하여, 1g-65 단계에서 단말(1g-01)에게 L1/L2 핸드오버를 지시한다. 상기 단계에서 핸드오버 지시자를 포함하는 L1/L2 시그널링으로는 MAC CE 및 DCI가 사용될 수 있다. 상기의 1g-60 및 1g-65 단계의 L1/L2 핸드오버를 결정하기 위한 L1 측정값을 수신하고 핸드오버를 결정하는 것은 소스 셀(DU, 1g-02) 혹은 소스 기지국 (CU, 1g-03)일 수 있다. 만약, 기지국(CU, 1g-03)이 모든 결정을 할 경우, 소스 셀(DU, 1g-02) 은 단말(1g-01)로부터 수신한 L1 측정값을 전달하고, 기지국(CU, 1g-03)의 핸드오버 결정 지시에 따라 L1/L2 시그널링을 단말(1g-01)에게 전달한다. 하지만, 소스 셀(DU, 1g-02)이 최종 결정을 할 경우, L1 측정값을 기지국에게 전달하지 않고, 이전 기지국으로부터 수신한 각 후보 주변 셀들에 대한 핸드오버 결정을 내리기 위한 측정값 기준(임계값 및 측정값 범위)에 따라 핸드오버를 스스로 결정하고, 이에 따라 L1/L2 시그널링을 단말(1g-01)에게 전달한다. In step 1g-60, the terminal (1g-01) performs L1 measurement and report for each candidate surrounding cell, and the source cell that receives the report makes a handover decision and instructs the terminal (1g-01) to perform L1/L2 handover in step 1g-65. In the above step, MAC CE and DCI can be used as L1/L2 signaling including a handover indicator. The source cell (DU, 1g-02) or the source base station (CU, 1g-03) can receive the L1 measurement values for determining the L1/L2 handover in steps 1g-60 and 1g-65 and determine the handover. If the base station (CU, 1g-03) makes all decisions, the source cell (DU, 1g-02) transmits the L1 measurement values received from the terminal (1g-01) and transmits L1/L2 signaling to the terminal (1g-01) according to the handover decision instruction of the base station (CU, 1g-03). However, if the source cell (DU, 1g-02) makes the final decision, it does not transmit the L1 measurement values to the base station, but decides the handover on its own according to the measurement value criteria (threshold value and measurement value range) for making the handover decision for each candidate neighboring cell received from the previous base station, and transmits L1/L2 signaling to the terminal (1g-01) accordingly.

L1/L2 핸드오버 지시가 단말(1g-01)에게 전달되면, 단말(1g-01)은 1g-70 단계에서 핸드오버 절차를 시작하고, L1/L2 핸드오버를 위한 타이머를 구동한다. 상기 타이머는 LTM을 위해 새롭게 설정된 타이머일 수 있으며, 혹은 기존 핸드오버에 사용되는 T304 타이머를 재사용할 수도 있다. 또한, 단말(1g-01)은 L1/L2 핸드오버가 적용되는 타겟 셀에 대한 설정을 적용한다. 이는 1g-30/1g-40/1g-45/1g-55 단계에서 미리 수신한 주변 셀 설정 중 하나이다. 1g-75 단계에서 적용되는 설정에 따라 단말(1g-01)은 해당 타겟 셀에 대해 랜덤 액세스가 필요한 경우 랜덤 액세스를 수행하고, 랜덤 액세스가 지시되지 않거나 필요하지 않은 경우(상향링크 동기가 이미 수행되거나 맞춰져 있는 경우)에는 랜덤 액세스 절차를 생략한다. When the L1/L2 handover instruction is transmitted to the terminal (1g-01), the terminal (1g-01) starts a handover procedure in step 1g-70 and starts a timer for L1/L2 handover. The timer may be a newly set timer for LTM, or may reuse a T304 timer used for an existing handover. In addition, the terminal (1g-01) applies a setting for a target cell to which the L1/L2 handover is applied. This is one of the neighboring cell settings previously received in steps 1g-30/1g-40/1g-45/1g-55. Depending on the setting applied in step 1g-75, the terminal (1g-01) performs a random access for the corresponding target cell if random access is required, and skips the random access procedure if random access is not indicated or is not required (if uplink synchronization has already been performed or aligned).

1g-80 단계에서 단말(1g-01)은 타겟 셀과 핸드오버 완료 절차를 수행한다. 해당 절차는 핸드오버 완료 지시를 하는 방법에 따라 달라질 수 있으며, 타겟 셀의 설정을 RRC 메시지 레벨로 수신한 경우 RRCReconfiugrationComplete 메시지를 전달하는 과정일 수 있으나, 셀 레벨 혹은 셀 그룹 레벨의 설정을 수신한 경우에는 새로운 핸드오버 완료 지시 메시지(새로운 RRC 메시지 혹은 MAC CE)가 해당 절차를 대신할 수 있다.In step 1g-80, the terminal (1g-01) performs a handover completion procedure with the target cell. The procedure may vary depending on the method of indicating the handover completion, and may be a process of transmitting an RRCReconfiugrationComplete message if the target cell configuration is received at the RRC message level, but if the cell level or cell group level configuration is received, a new handover completion indication message (new RRC message or MAC CE) may replace the procedure.

1g-85 단계에서 LTM이 완료된 이후 타겟 셀(DU2, 1g-04)은 기지국(CU, 1g-03)에게 LTM 절차가 완료되어 단말(1g-01)이 해당 셀에 성공적으로 RRC 연결을 수행하였음을 알린다. 이후 기지국(CU, 1g-03)은 소스 셀(1g-02)에게 해당 단말(1g-01)에 대한 연결을 종료할 것을 지시하고, UE context를 release 할 것을 지시한다.After LTM is completed at step 1g-85, the target cell (DU2, 1g-04) informs the base station (CU, 1g-03) that the LTM procedure is completed and the terminal (1g-01) has successfully performed RRC connection to the cell. Thereafter, the base station (CU, 1g-03) instructs the source cell (1g-02) to terminate the connection to the terminal (1g-01) and to release the UE context.

도면에서는 생략되어 있지만, 기준 셀 및 기준 셀의 설정의 변경이 필요한 경우, 기지국 CU와 주변 셀들 사이의 F1 인터페이스 메시지들로 설정 관련 동작이 업데이트될 수 있다. 특히 기준 셀의 설정이 변경되는 경우, 앞서 설명한 LTM 후보 셀 설정 절차가 반복되어 기준 셀 설정 변경 및 LTM 후보 셀 설정 변경 절차가 수행되고, 단말에게 변경된 설정 정보가 전달된다. 또한, 본 도면에서는 생략되었지만, L1/L2 기반의 핸드오버가 적용되는 주변 후보 셀들을 동적으로 지시하기 위한 새로운 MAC CE 및 DCI가 도입되어, 동적으로 유효한 설정이 지시 혹은 설정 해제(미리 전달한 L1/L2 기반 핸드오버 설정 release)될 수도 있다. 혹은 상술한 관련 동작은 기지국이 내부적으로 수행하고 단말에게 별도의 시그널링을 전달하지 않을 수 있다.Although omitted in the drawing, when a change in a reference cell and its configuration is required, configuration-related operations may be updated with F1 interface messages between the base station CU and neighboring cells. In particular, when the configuration of the reference cell is changed, the LTM candidate cell configuration procedure described above is repeated to perform the reference cell configuration change and LTM candidate cell configuration change procedures, and the changed configuration information is transmitted to the terminal. In addition, although omitted in the drawing, new MAC CE and DCI may be introduced to dynamically indicate neighboring candidate cells to which L1/L2-based handover is applied, so that dynamically valid configurations may be indicated or released (previously transmitted L1/L2-based handover configurations may be released). Alternatively, the above-described related operations may be performed internally by the base station without transmitting separate signaling to the terminal.

도 8은 본 개시에 적용되는 예시 3으로, inter-CU 시나리오에서 L1/L2 기반의 핸드오버를 위한 주변 셀들에 대한 설정에 대해, 효과적인 RRC 설정 업데이트를 제공하기 위한 제 1 LTM 후보 셀 RRC 설정 방법 및 절차를 도시한 도면이다. FIG. 8 is a diagram illustrating a first LTM candidate cell RRC configuration method and procedure for providing effective RRC configuration update for configuration of neighboring cells for L1/L2 based handover in an inter-CU scenario, as an example 3 applied to the present disclosure.

RRC 연결 상태의 단말(1h-01)은 소스 셀 1(DU 1, 1h-02)과 데이터 송수신을 수행하다가 1h-10 단계에서 설정된 레이어 3 측정 및 보고에 따라 서빙 셀 및 주변 셀들에 대한 측정값을 소스 셀 1(DU 1, 1h-02)에 전달한다. 이때 실제 측정 값은 기지국의 CU1(1h-03)에게 전달된다. 이는 기지국 CU1(1h-03)에서 RRC 메시지 처리를 담당하고, mobility를 결정하기 때문이다. The terminal (1h-01) in the RRC connection state performs data transmission and reception with the source cell 1 (DU 1, 1h-02), and transmits the measurement values for the serving cell and surrounding cells to the source cell 1 (DU 1, 1h-02) according to the layer 3 measurement and reporting set in step 1h-10. At this time, the actual measurement values are transmitted to the CU1 (1h-03) of the base station. This is because the base station CU1 (1h-03) is responsible for RRC message processing and determines mobility.

기지국 CU1(1h-03)는 1h-15 단계에서, 단말(1h-01)로부터 전달된 측정값 보고에 따라 주변 셀들(DU 2 - CU 2, 1h-04; DU M, 1h-05)에게 L1/L2 기반의 핸드오버를 위한 설정 정보를 요청하는 메시지(L1/L2 config request message)를 생성해서 기지국 CU2(1h-06)에게 Xn 인터페이스로 전달하고, 기지국 CU2(1h-06)는 이를 각 주변 셀들(DU 2 - CU 2, 1h-04; DU M, 1h-05)에게 F1 인터페이스로 전달한다. 도면에서 후보 셀을 DU와 연계해서 표기하였지만, 실제로는 후보 셀과 DU가 1:1 매핑이거나 복수의 후보 셀이 하나의 DU에 포함될 수도 있다. 또한 상기의 L1/L2 기반의 핸드오버를 위한 설정 정보를 요청하는 메시지는 기존의 핸드오버 요청 메시지, UE context 요청 메시지, UE context 수정 요청 메시지 등 일수도 있고, 새로운 F1 혹은 Xn 메시지일 수 있다. 상기 L1/L2 기반의 핸드오버를 위한 설정 정보를 요청하는 메시지에는 주변 셀들에게 L1/L2 기반의 핸드오버 후보 셀로 결정된 것을 요청함과 동시에, 해당 셀로 L1/L2 기반의 핸드오버가 수행될 때 적용되는 RRC 설정 정보를 요청한다. 상기에서도 설명하였듯이, L1/L2 기반의 핸드오버가 수행될 때 적용되는 RRC 설정 정보는 셀 레벨, 셀 그룹 레벨, RRC 메시지 레벨의 구조 중 하나를 가질 수 있다. 또한, 상기의 L1/L2 기반의 핸드오버를 위한 설정 정보를 요청하는 메시지는 기준 셀에 대한 정보 및 설정이 동시에 전달될 수 있다. 또한, 해당 기준 셀에 대한 설정 정보가 L1/L2 기반의 핸드오버를 위한 설정 정보를 요청하는 메시지를 통하여 같이 전달될 수 있다. 또한, 상기 메시지에는 후보 주변 셀들(1h-04, 1h-05)에게 L1/L2 기반의 핸드오버를 위한 설정 정보를 delta configuration을 적용하여 전달해달라는 지시자가 포함될 수도 있다. 상기 지시자는 각 셀 별로 요청되거나 모든 셀들에게 공통적으로 요청될 수도 있다. 예시 3에서는 후보 주변 셀들(1h-04, 1h-05)이 inter CU내의 다른 DU내에 존재하는 경우를 예시로 설명하기로 한다. At step 1h-15, base station CU1 (1h-03) generates a message (L1/L2 config request message) requesting configuration information for L1/L2-based handover to neighboring cells (DU 2 - CU 2, 1h-04; DU M, 1h-05) based on the measurement value report transmitted from terminal (1h-01), and transmits the message to base station CU2 (1h-06) through Xn interface, and base station CU2 (1h-06) transmits the message to each neighboring cell (DU 2 - CU 2, 1h-04; DU M, 1h-05) through F1 interface. In the drawing, candidate cells are shown in connection with DUs, but in reality, candidate cells and DUs may be mapped 1:1, or multiple candidate cells may be included in one DU. In addition, the message requesting the configuration information for the above L1/L2-based handover may be an existing handover request message, a UE context request message, a UE context modification request message, etc., or may be a new F1 or Xn message. The message requesting the configuration information for the L1/L2-based handover requests neighboring cells to be determined as candidate cells for the L1/L2-based handover, and at the same time requests RRC configuration information to be applied when the L1/L2-based handover is performed to the corresponding cell. As described above, the RRC configuration information applied when the L1/L2-based handover is performed may have one of the structures of a cell level, a cell group level, and an RRC message level. In addition, the message requesting the configuration information for the above L1/L2-based handover may simultaneously transmit information and configuration for a reference cell. In addition, the configuration information for the corresponding reference cell may be transmitted together through the message requesting the configuration information for the L1/L2-based handover. Additionally, the message may include an instruction to transfer the setup information for L1/L2-based handover to candidate neighboring cells (1h-04, 1h-05) by applying delta configuration. The instruction may be requested for each cell or may be requested commonly to all cells. In Example 3, a case where candidate neighboring cells (1h-04, 1h-05) exist in different DUs within inter CU is described as an example.

1h-20 단계에서 L1/L2 기반의 핸드오버를 위한 설정 정보를 요청하는 메시지를 수신한 후보 주변 셀들(1h-04, 1h-05)은, 전달된 기준 셀의 설정 정보를 기반으로 해서 L1/L2 기반의 핸드오버가 적용되었을 때의 각 후보 주변 셀들의 설정 정보를 delta configuration 기반으로 생성한다. 이후 1h-25 단계에서 각 후보 주변 셀들(1h-04, 1h-05)은 생성된 L1/L2 기반의 핸드오버를 위한 설정 정보를 L1/L2 기반의 핸드오버를 위한 설정 정보 응답 메시지(L1/L2 config response message)에 수납하여 기지국 CU 2(1h-06)에게 전달한다. 기지국 CU 2(1h-06)는 주변 셀들(DU 2 - CU 2, 1h-04; DU M, 1h-05)로부터 수신한 LTM 설정 응답 메시지를 소스 기지국인 CU1 (1h-03)에게 전달한다. 상기 단계에서 LTM 후보 셀들에 대한 설정 정보는 셀 설정 및 셀 그룹 설정(CellGroupConfig)에 해당한다. 또한 상기 단계에서 각 LTM 후보 셀들(1h-04, 1h-05)은 CU(1h-02)로부터의 delta configuration 요청에 대해 거부할 수도 있으며, 이 경우, full configuration을 적용하고 이를 지시하는 지시자를 포함하여 CU(1h-03)에게 전달할 수 있다.At step 1h-20, the candidate neighboring cells (1h-04, 1h-05) that have received a message requesting configuration information for L1/L2-based handover generate configuration information of each candidate neighboring cell based on delta configuration when L1/L2-based handover is applied based on the configuration information of the transmitted reference cell. Thereafter, at step 1h-25, each candidate neighboring cell (1h-04, 1h-05) stores the generated L1/L2-based handover configuration information in an L1/L2-based handover configuration information response message (L1/L2 config response message) and transfers it to base station CU 2 (1h-06). Base station CU 2 (1h-06) transfers the LTM configuration response message received from the neighboring cells (DU 2 - CU 2, 1h-04; DU M, 1h-05) to source base station CU1 (1h-03). In the above step, the configuration information for the LTM candidate cells corresponds to the cell configuration and cell group configuration (CellGroupConfig). In addition, in the above step, each LTM candidate cell (1h-04, 1h-05) may reject the delta configuration request from the CU (1h-02), in which case, the full configuration may be applied and transmitted to the CU (1h-03) including an instruction indicating this.

1h-30 단계에서 소스 셀(1h-02)은, 기지국 CU(1h-03)이 생성한 RRC 메시지를 전달받아 단말(1h-01)에게 전달한다. 해당 RRC 메시지는 L1/L2 기반의 핸드오버가 적용되는 주변 후보 셀들에 대한 설정 정보(Pre-Config1, 쪋, Pre-ConfigN, 1h-31)를 수납한 메시지이며, 각 LTM 후보 셀들에 대한 설정 정보는 각 후보 셀들(DU로부터 수신한 셀 그룹 설정(CellGroupConfig)에, CU에서 생성된 무선 베어러 설정(RadioBearerConfig), L3 측정 관련 설정(MeasConfig)이 포함되어 생성된 메시지일 수 있다. 이는 DU에서는 lower layer 설정인 셀 그룹 설정을 생성해서 CU에게 전달하지만 무선 베어러 및 L3 측정 관련 설정은 CU에서 생성하기 때문에, 각 LTM 후보 셀들에 대한 설정 정보를 CU(1h-03)에서 최종적으로 컨테이너(Pre-Config)로 생성 및 관리하여 RRC 메시지를 통해 단말(1h-01)에게 전달한다. 이에 따라 각 LTM 후보 셀들에 대한 설정 정보(Pre-Config)에는 LTM 후보 셀들을 지칭할 수 있는 인덱스가 존재한다. 해당 인덱스는 실제 셀 인덱스이거나 논리적으로 새롭게 생성된 LTM 후보 셀의 설정을 지칭하는 인덱스일 수 있다. At step 1h-30, the source cell (1h-02) receives the RRC message generated by the base station CU (1h-03) and transmits it to the terminal (1h-01). The RRC message is a message that contains configuration information (Pre-Config1, 쪋, Pre-ConfigN, 1h-31) for surrounding candidate cells to which L1/L2-based handover is applied, and the configuration information for each LTM candidate cell may be a message generated by including the cell group configuration (CellGroupConfig) received from each candidate cell (radio bearer configuration (RadioBearerConfig) and L3 measurement-related configuration (MeasConfig) generated by the CU). This is because the DU generates the cell group configuration, which is a lower layer configuration, and transfers it to the CU, but the radio bearer and L3 measurement-related configuration are generated by the CU. Therefore, the configuration information for each LTM candidate cell is finally generated and managed as a container (Pre-Config) by the CU (1h-03) and transferred to the terminal (1h-01) through an RRC message. Accordingly, the configuration information (Pre-Config) for each LTM candidate cell has an index that can refer to the LTM candidate cells. The index may be an actual cell index or a logical index of a newly generated LTM candidate cell. It may be an index referring to a setting.

1h-35 단계에서 해당 RRC 메시지를 수신한 단말(1h-01)은 RRC 메시지를 디코딩하고 프로세싱하는 절차를 수행한다. 상기 프로세싱에는 수신한 메시지의 ASN.1 디코딩 및 유효성 판정과 설정 내용을 저장 관리하는 방법 등이 포함된다.The terminal (1h-01) that receives the RRC message in step 1h-35 performs a procedure for decoding and processing the RRC message. The processing includes ASN.1 decoding and validity determination of the received message and a method for storing and managing the configuration contents.

기지국 및 각각의 LTM 후보 셀들은 상기 단계에서 전달된 LTM 후보 셀 설정 정보가 변경된 경우, 이를 업데이트 하는 절차를 수행한다. 본 개시의 예시들에서는 이와 같은 경우, LTM 후보 셀 설정 정보를 효과적으로 업데이트 하기 위한 LTM 후보 셀 RRC 설정의 구조를 제안하고 전체 절차를 제안하는 것을 특징으로 한다. 즉, LTM 후보 셀 RRC 설정의 세부 설정 중, 서빙 셀 및 셀 그룹 설정 (CellGroupConfig) 혹은 무선 베어러 설정 (RadioBearerConfig) 혹은 레이어3 측정 관련 설정 (MeasConfig) 중 적어도 한 개 이상의 설정이 변경될 수 있다. The base station and each LTM candidate cell perform a procedure for updating the LTM candidate cell configuration information transmitted in the above step, if it has changed. In the examples of the present disclosure, in such a case, a structure of an LTM candidate cell RRC configuration for effectively updating the LTM candidate cell configuration information is proposed, and the overall procedure is proposed. That is, among the detailed settings of the LTM candidate cell RRC configuration, at least one of the serving cell and cell group configuration (CellGroupConfig), the radio bearer configuration (RadioBearerConfig), or the layer 3 measurement related configuration (MeasConfig) may be changed.

1h-40 단계에서는 LTM 후보 셀 1에서 무선 베어러 설정(RadioBearerConfig)의 변경이 필요한 경우, 기지국의 CU2(1h-06)에서 해당 셀에 대한 무선 베어러 설정 (RadioBearerConfig1, 1h-40) 변경을 생성하여 소스 기지국의 CU1(1h-03)에게 전달한다. In step 1h-40, if a change in radio bearer configuration (RadioBearerConfig) is required in LTM candidate cell 1, CU2 (1h-06) of the base station generates a change in radio bearer configuration (RadioBearerConfig1, 1h-40) for the corresponding cell and transmits it to CU1 (1h-03) of the source base station.

1h-45 단계에서 소스 기지국의 CU1(1h-03)은, 수신한 무선 베어러 설정 변경 내용을 해당 LTM 후보 셀 설정 컨테이너(Pre-Config1, 1h-46)에 포함하여 단말에게 RRC 메시지를 통해 전달한다. 여기서 Pre-Config1(1h-46)에는 업데이트 되는 RadioBearerConfig 설정 정보(1h-47)와 LTM 후보 셀에 대한 설정을 지시하는 인덱스가 포함되며, LTM 후보 셀 설정 정보의 다른 정보(CellGroupConfig, MeasConfig)들은 생략될 수 있다. 또한, 상기 RadioBearerConfig는 delta configuration이 적용될 수 있다. At step 1h-45, CU1 (1h-03) of the source base station includes the received radio bearer configuration change contents in the corresponding LTM candidate cell configuration container (Pre-Config1, 1h-46) and transmits it to the terminal through an RRC message. Here, Pre-Config1 (1h-46) includes updated RadioBearerConfig configuration information (1h-47) and an index indicating the configuration for the LTM candidate cell, and other information (CellGroupConfig, MeasConfig) of the LTM candidate cell configuration information may be omitted. In addition, delta configuration may be applied to the RadioBearerConfig.

1h-50 단계에서는 LTM 후보 셀 1에서 L3 측정관련 설정(MeasConfig)의 변경이 필요한 경우, 기지국의 CU2(1h-06)는, 해당 셀에 대한 L3 측정관련 설정(MeasConfig1, 1h-50) 변경을 생성하여 소스 기지국의 CU1(1h-03)에게 전달한다. 1h-55 단계에서 소스 기지국의 CU1(1h-03)은 LTM 후보 셀 1로부터 수신한 정보를, 해당 LTM 후보 셀 설정 컨테이너(Pre-Config1, 1h-56)에 포함하여 단말(1h-01)에게 RRC 메시지를 통하여 전달한다. 여기서 Pre-Config1(1h-56)에는 업데이트 되는 L3 측정관련 설정 (MeasConfig1, 1h-57) 정보와 LTM 후보 셀에 대한 설정을 지시하는 인덱스가 포함되며, LTM 후보 셀 설정 정보의 다른 정보(CellGroupConfig, RadioBearerConfig)들은 생략될 수 있다. 또한, 상기 MeasConfig는 delta configuration이 적용될 수 있다. In step 1h-50, if a change in L3 measurement-related configuration (MeasConfig) is required in LTM candidate cell 1, CU2 (1h-06) of the base station generates a change in L3 measurement-related configuration (MeasConfig1, 1h-50) for the corresponding cell and transmits it to CU1 (1h-03) of the source base station. In step 1h-55, CU1 (1h-03) of the source base station includes the information received from LTM candidate cell 1 in the corresponding LTM candidate cell configuration container (Pre-Config1, 1h-56) and transmits it to the terminal (1h-01) through an RRC message. Here, Pre-Config1 (1h-56) includes updated L3 measurement-related configuration (MeasConfig1, 1h-57) information and an index indicating the configuration for the LTM candidate cell, and other information (CellGroupConfig, RadioBearerConfig) of the LTM candidate cell configuration information may be omitted. Additionally, the above MeasConfig can apply delta configuration.

상기 LTM 후보 셀에 대한 RadioBearerConfig와 MeasConfig의 변경 절차(기지국의 CU2(1h-03)에서 설정 변경 동작 수행)와는 달리 CellGroupConfig에 대한 설정 변경이 필요한 경우, 각 LTM 후보 셀들(DU 2, 1h-04; DU M, 1h-05)에서 설정 변경을 요청하고 변경된 설정을 기지국의 CU2(1h-06)에게 전달하도록 하는 동작이 필요하다. 이를 위하여, 1h-60 단계에서 LTM 후보 셀 1은, CellGroupConfig1에 대한 설정 변경을 요청하는 메시지를 F1 인터페이스로 기지국의 CU2(1h-06)에게 전달한다. 1h-65 단계에서 기지국의 CU2(1h-06)는, LTM 후보 셀 1(DU 2, 1h-04)로부터 전달된 CellGroupConfig1(1h-67)을 적용하고, 해당 LTM 후보 셀 설정 컨테이너(Pre-Config1, 1h-66)에 이를 포함하여 단말에게 RRC 메시지를 통해 전달한다. 여기서 Pre-Config1(1h-66)에는 업데이트 되는 CellGroupConfig1 설정 정보와 LTM 후보 셀에 대한 설정을 지시하는 인덱스가 포함되며, LTM 후보 셀 설정 정보의 다른 정보(RadioBearerConfig, MeasConfig)들은 생략될 수 있다. 또한, 상기 CellGroupConfig1는 delta configuration이 적용될 수 있다. Unlike the procedure for changing RadioBearerConfig and MeasConfig for the above LTM candidate cells (performing a configuration change operation in CU2 (1h-03) of the base station), when a configuration change for CellGroupConfig is required, an operation is required to request a configuration change in each LTM candidate cell (DU 2, 1h-04; DU M, 1h-05) and transmit the changed configuration to CU2 (1h-06) of the base station. To this end, in step 1h-60, LTM candidate cell 1 transmits a message requesting a configuration change for CellGroupConfig1 to CU2 (1h-06) of the base station through the F1 interface. At step 1h-65, CU2 (1h-06) of the base station applies CellGroupConfig1 (1h-67) transmitted from LTM candidate cell 1 (DU 2, 1h-04), includes it in the corresponding LTM candidate cell configuration container (Pre-Config1, 1h-66), and transmits it to the terminal through an RRC message. Here, Pre-Config1 (1h-66) includes updated CellGroupConfig1 configuration information and an index indicating configuration for the LTM candidate cell, and other information (RadioBearerConfig, MeasConfig) of the LTM candidate cell configuration information may be omitted. In addition, delta configuration may be applied to the CellGroupConfig1.

1h-70 단계에서 단말(1h-01)은 각 후보 주변 셀들에 대한 L1 측정 및 보고를 수행하게 되고, 이를 수신한 소스 셀이 핸드오버를 결정하면, 1h-65 단계에서 단말(1h-01)에게 L1/L2 핸드오버를 지시한다. 상기 단계에서 핸드오버 지시자를 포함하는 L1/L2 시그널링으로는 MAC CE 및 DCI가 사용될 수 있다. 상기의 1h-70 및 1h-75 단계의 L1/L2 핸드오버를 결정하기 위한 L1 측정값을 수신하고 핸드오버를 결정하는 것은 소스 셀(DU, 1h-02) 혹은 소스 기지국(CU, 1h-03)일 수 있다. 만약, 기지국(CU, 1h-03)가 모든 결정을 할 경우, 소스 셀(DU, 1h-02)은 단말(1h-01)로부터 수신한 L1 측정값을 전달하고, 기지국 (CU, 1h-03)의 핸드오버 결정 지시에 따라 L1/L2 시그널링을 단말(1h-01)에게 전달한다. 하지만, 소스 셀(DU, 1h-02)이 최종 결정을 할 경우, L1 측정값을 기지국에게 전달하지 않고, 이전 기지국으로부터 수신한 각 후보 주변 셀들에 대한 핸드오버 결정을 내리기 위한 측정값 기준(임계값 및 측정값 범위)에 따라 핸드오버를 스스로 결정하며, 이에 따라 L1/L2 시그널링을 단말에게 전달한다. In step 1h-70, the terminal (1h-01) performs L1 measurement and reporting for each candidate surrounding cell, and if the source cell receiving the measurement determines a handover, it instructs the terminal (1h-01) to perform L1/L2 handover in step 1h-65. In the above step, MAC CE and DCI can be used as L1/L2 signaling including a handover indicator. The source cell (DU, 1h-02) or the source base station (CU, 1h-03) can receive the L1 measurement values for determining the L1/L2 handover in steps 1h-70 and 1h-75 and determine the handover. If the base station (CU, 1h-03) makes all decisions, the source cell (DU, 1h-02) transmits the L1 measurement values received from the terminal (1h-01) and transmits L1/L2 signaling to the terminal (1h-01) according to the handover decision instruction of the base station (CU, 1h-03). However, if the source cell (DU, 1h-02) makes the final decision, it does not transmit the L1 measurement values to the base station, but decides the handover on its own according to the measurement value criteria (threshold value and measurement value range) for making the handover decision for each candidate neighboring cell received from the previous base station, and transmits L1/L2 signaling to the terminal accordingly.

L1/L2 핸드오버 지시가 단말(1h-01)에게 전달되면, 단말은 1h-80 단계에서 핸드오버 절차를 시작하고, L1/L2 핸드오버를 위한 타이머를 구동한다. 상기 타이머는 LTM을 위해 새롭게 설정된 타이머일 수 있으며, 혹은 기존 핸드오버에 사용되는 T304 타이머를 재사용할 수도 있다. 또한, 단말(1h-01)은 L1/L2 핸드오버가 적용되는 타겟 셀에 대한 설정을 적용한다. 이는 1h-30/1h-45/1h-55/1h-65 단계에서 미리 수신한 주변 셀 설정 중 하나이다. When the L1/L2 handover instruction is transmitted to the terminal (1h-01), the terminal starts the handover procedure in step 1h-80 and starts a timer for L1/L2 handover. The timer may be a newly set timer for LTM, or may reuse a T304 timer used for an existing handover. In addition, the terminal (1h-01) applies a setting for a target cell to which L1/L2 handover is applied. This is one of the neighboring cell settings received in advance in steps 1h-30/1h-45/1h-55/1h-65.

1h-85 단계에서 적용되는 설정에 따라 단말(1h-01)은 해당 타겟 셀에 대해 랜덤 액세스가 필요한 경우 랜덤 액세스를 수행하고, 랜덤 액세스가 지시되지 않거나 필요하지 않은 경우 (상향링크 동기가 이미 수행되거나 맞춰져 있는 경우)에는 랜덤 액세스 절차를 생략한다. Depending on the settings applied in step 1h-85, the terminal (1h-01) performs random access if random access is required for the target cell, and skips the random access procedure if random access is not indicated or required (uplink synchronization has already been performed or aligned).

1h-90 단계에서 단말(1h-01)은 타겟 셀과 핸드오버 완료 절차를 수행한다. 해당 절차는 핸드오버 완료 지시를 하는 방법에 따라 달라질 수 있으며, 타겟 셀의 설정을 RRC 메시지 레벨로 수신한 경우 RRCReconfiugrationComplete 메시지를 전달하는 과정일수 있으나, 셀 레벨 혹은 셀 그룹 레벨의 설정을 수신한 경우에는 새로운 핸드오버 완료 지시 메시지(새로운 RRC 메시지 혹은 MAC CE)가 해당 절차를 대신할 수 있다.At step 1h-90, the terminal (1h-01) performs a handover completion procedure with the target cell. The procedure may vary depending on the method of indicating the handover completion, and may be a process of transmitting an RRCReconfiugrationComplete message if the target cell configuration is received at the RRC message level, but if the cell level or cell group level configuration is received, a new handover completion indication message (new RRC message or MAC CE) may replace the procedure.

1h-95 단계에서 LTM이 완료된 이후 타겟 셀(DU2, 1h-04)은 기지국(CU, 1h-03)에게 LTM 절차가 완료되어 단말(1h-01)이 해당 셀에 성공적으로 RRC 연결을 수행하였음을 알린다. 이후 기지국(CU, 1h-03)은, 소스 셀(1h-02)에 해당 단말에 대한 연결을 종료할 것을 지시하고, UE context를 release 할 것을 지시한다.After LTM is completed at step 1h-95, the target cell (DU2, 1h-04) informs the base station (CU, 1h-03) that the LTM procedure is completed and the terminal (1h-01) has successfully performed RRC connection to the corresponding cell. Thereafter, the base station (CU, 1h-03) instructs the source cell (1h-02) to terminate the connection to the corresponding terminal and to release the UE context.

도면에서는 생략되어 있지만, 기준 셀 및 기준 셀의 설정의 변경이 필요한 경우, 기지국 CU와 주변 셀들 사이의 F1 인터페이스 및 기지국 CU1과 기지국 CU2 사이의 Xn 인터페이스 메시지들에 의하여 설정 관련 동작이 업데이트될 수 있다. 특히 기준 셀의 설정이 변경되는 경우, 앞서 설명한 LTM 후보 셀 설정 절차가 반복되어 기준 셀 설정 변경 및 LTM 후보 셀 설정 변경 절차가 수행되고, 단말에게 변경된 설정 정보가 전달된다. 또한, 본 도면에서는 생략되었지만, L1/L2 기반의 핸드오버가 적용되는 주변 후보 셀들을 동적으로 지시하기 위한 새로운 MAC CE 및 DCI가 도입되어, 동적으로 유효한 설정이 지시 혹은 설정 해제(미리 전달한 L1/L2 기반 핸드오버 설정 release)될 수도 있다. 혹은 상술한 관련 동작은 기지국이 내부적으로 수행하고 단말에게 별도의 시그널링을 전달하지 않을 수 있다.Although omitted in the drawing, when a change in a reference cell and its configuration is required, configuration-related operations may be updated by messages in the F1 interface between the base station CU and neighboring cells and in the Xn interface between the base station CU1 and base station CU2. In particular, when the configuration of the reference cell is changed, the LTM candidate cell configuration procedure described above is repeated to perform the reference cell configuration change and LTM candidate cell configuration change procedures, and the changed configuration information is transmitted to the terminal. In addition, although omitted in the drawing, new MAC CE and DCI may be introduced to dynamically indicate neighboring candidate cells to which L1/L2-based handover is applied, so that dynamically valid configurations may be indicated or released (previously transmitted L1/L2-based handover configurations may be released). Alternatively, the above-described related operations may be performed internally by the base station without transmitting separate signaling to the terminal.

도 9는 본 개시에 적용되는 예시 4로써, inter-CU 시나리오에서 L1/L2 기반의 핸드오버를 위한 주변 셀들에 대한 설정에 대해, 효과적인 RRC 설정 업데이트를 제공하기 위한 제 2 LTM 후보 셀 RRC 설정 방법 및 절차를 도시한 도면이다. FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating a second LTM candidate cell RRC configuration method and procedure for providing effective RRC configuration update for configuration of neighboring cells for L1/L2 based handover in an inter-CU scenario, as Example 4 applied to the present disclosure.

RRC 연결 상태의 단말(1i-01)은 소스 셀 1(DU 1, 1i-02)과 데이터 송수신을 수행하다가 1i-10 단계에서 설정된 레이어 3 측정 및 보고에 따라 서빙 셀 및 주변 셀들에 대한 측정값을 소스 셀 1(DU 1, 1i-02)에 전달한다. 이때 실제 측정 값은 기지국의 CU(1i-03)에게 전달된다. 이는 기지국 CU(1i-03)에서 RRC 메시지 처리를 담당하고, mobility를 결정하기 때문이다. 기지국 CU(1i-03)는 단말로부터 전달된 측정값 보고에 따라 주변 셀들(DU 2, 1i-04; DU M, 1i-05)에게 1i-15 단계에서 L1/L2 기반의 핸드오버를 위한 설정 정보를 요청하는 메시지(L1/L2 config request message)를 생성해서 기지국 CU2(1i-06)에게 Xn 인터페이스로 전달하고, 기지국 CU2(1i-06)는 이를 각 주변 셀들(DU 2 - CU 2, 1i-04; DU M, 1i-05)에게 F1 인터페이스로 전달한다. 도면에서 후보 셀을 DU와 연계해서 표기하였지만, 실제로는 후보 셀과 DU가 1:1 매핑이거나 복수의 후보 셀이 하나의 DU에 포함될 수도 있다. 또한 상기의 L1/L2 기반의 핸드오버를 위한 설정 정보를 요청하는 메시지는 기존의 핸드오버 요청 메시지, UE context 요청 메시지, UE context 수정 요청 메시지 등 일수도 있고, 새로운 F1 혹은 Xn 메시지일 수 있다. 상기 L1/L2 기반의 핸드오버를 위한 설정 정보를 요청하는 메시지에는 주변 셀들에게 L1/L2 기반의 핸드오버 후보 셀로 결정된 것을 요청함과 동시에, 해당 셀로 L1/L2 기반의 핸드오버가 수행될 때 적용되는 RRC 설정 정보를 요청한다. 상기에서도 설명하였듯이, L1/L2 기반의 핸드오버가 수행될 때 적용되는 RRC 설정 정보는 셀 레벨, 셀 그룹 레벨, RRC 메시지 레벨의 구조 중 하나를 가질 수 있다. 또한, 상기의 L1/L2 기반의 핸드오버를 위한 설정 정보를 요청하는 메시지는 기준 셀에 대한 정보 및 설정이 동시에 전달될 수 있다. 또한, 해당 기준 셀에 대한 설정 정보는 L1/L2 기반의 핸드오버를 위한 설정 정보를 요청하는 메시지와 같이 전달될 수 있다. 또한, 상기 메시지에는 후보 주변 셀들(1i-04, 1i-05)에게 L1/L2 기반의 핸드오버를 위한 설정 정보를 delta configuration을 적용하여 전달해달라는 지시자가 포함될 수도 있다. 상기 지시자는 각 셀 별로 요청되거나 모든 셀들에게 공통적으로 요청될 수도 있다. The terminal (1i-01) in the RRC connection state performs data transmission and reception with the source cell 1 (DU 1, 1i-02), and transmits the measurement values for the serving cell and surrounding cells to the source cell 1 (DU 1, 1i-02) according to the layer 3 measurement and reporting set in step 1i-10. At this time, the actual measurement values are transmitted to the CU (1i-03) of the base station. This is because the base station CU (1i-03) is responsible for RRC message processing and determines mobility. The base station CU (1i-03) generates a message (L1/L2 config request message) requesting configuration information for L1/L2-based handover at step 1i-15 to neighboring cells (DU 2, 1i-04; DU M, 1i-05) based on the measurement value report transmitted from the terminal and transmits it to the base station CU2 (1i-06) through the Xn interface. The base station CU2 (1i-06) then transmits it to each neighboring cell (DU 2 - CU 2, 1i-04; DU M, 1i-05) through the F1 interface. In the drawing, the candidate cell is shown in connection with the DU, but in reality, the candidate cell and the DU may be mapped 1:1 or multiple candidate cells may be included in one DU. In addition, the message requesting configuration information for the above L1/L2-based handover may be an existing handover request message, a UE context request message, a UE context modification request message, etc., or may be a new F1 or Xn message. The message requesting the configuration information for the L1/L2-based handover requests neighboring cells to be determined as candidate cells for the L1/L2-based handover, and at the same time requests RRC configuration information to be applied when the L1/L2-based handover is performed to the corresponding cell. As described above, the RRC configuration information to be applied when the L1/L2-based handover is performed may have one of the structures of a cell level, a cell group level, and an RRC message level. In addition, the message requesting the configuration information for the L1/L2-based handover may simultaneously transmit information and configuration for a reference cell. In addition, the configuration information for the reference cell may be transmitted together with the message requesting the configuration information for the L1/L2-based handover. In addition, the message may include an instruction to transmit the configuration information for the L1/L2-based handover to the candidate neighboring cells (1i-04, 1i-05) by applying a delta configuration. The instruction may be requested for each cell or may be commonly requested for all cells.

1i-20 단계에서 L1/L2 기반의 핸드오버를 위한 설정 정보를 요청하는 메시지를 수신한 후보 주변 셀들(1i-04, 1i-05)은, 전달된 기준 셀의 설정 정보를 기반으로 해서 L1/L2 기반의 핸드오버가 적용되었을 때의 각 후보 주변 셀들의 설정 정보를 delta configuration 기반으로 생성한다. 이후 1i-25 단계에서 각 후보 주변 셀들(1i-04, 1i-05)은 생성된 L1/L2 기반의 핸드오버를 위한 설정 정보를 L1/L2 기반의 핸드오버를 위한 설정 정보 응답 메시지(L1/L2 config response message)에 수납하여 기지국 CU 2(1i-06)에게 전달한다. 기지국 CU 2(1i-06)는 주변 셀들(DU 2 - CU 2, 1i-04; DU M, 1i-05)로부터 수신한 LTM 설정 응답 메시지를 소스 기지국인 CU 1(1i-03)에게 전달한다. 상기 단계에서 LTM 후보 셀들에 대한 설정 정보는 셀 설정 및 셀 그룹 설정(CellGroupConfig)에 해당한다. 또한 상기 단계에서 각 LTM 후보 셀들(1i-04, 1i-05)은, CU로부터의 delta configuration 요청에 대해 거부할 수도 있으며, 이 경우, full configuration을 적용하고 이를 지시하는 지시자를 포함하여 CU(1i-03)에게 전달할 수 있다.At step 1i-20, the candidate neighboring cells (1i-04, 1i-05) that have received a message requesting configuration information for L1/L2-based handover generate configuration information of each candidate neighboring cell based on delta configuration when L1/L2-based handover is applied based on the configuration information of the transmitted reference cell. Thereafter, at step 1i-25, each candidate neighboring cell (1i-04, 1i-05) stores the generated L1/L2-based handover configuration information in an L1/L2-based handover configuration information response message (L1/L2 config response message) and transfers it to base station CU 2 (1i-06). Base station CU 2 (1i-06) transfers the LTM configuration response message received from the neighboring cells (DU 2 - CU 2, 1i-04; DU M, 1i-05) to source base station CU 1 (1i-03). In the above step, the configuration information for the LTM candidate cells corresponds to the cell configuration and cell group configuration (CellGroupConfig). In addition, in the above step, each LTM candidate cell (1i-04, 1i-05) may reject the delta configuration request from the CU, and in this case, may apply the full configuration and transmit it to the CU (1i-03) including an instruction indicating this.

1i-30 단계에서 소스 셀(1i-02)은 기지국 CU(1i-03)이 생성한 RRC 메시지를 전달받아 단말(1i-01)에게 전달한다. 해당 RRC 메시지는 L1/L2 기반의 핸드오버가 적용되는 주변 후보 셀들에 대한 설정 정보로, 각 후보 셀들(DU)로부터 수신한 셀 그룹 설정(CellGroupConfig)들이 포함된 리스트(List of CellGroupConfig, 1i-31)와 후보 셀들에 적용되는 CU에서 생성한 무선 베어러 설정(RadioBearerConfig)의 리스트(List of RadioBearerConfig, 1i-32), 후보 셀들에 적용되는 CU에서 생성한 L3 측정 관련 설정(MeasConfig)의 리스트(List of MeasConfig, 1i-33)로 구성되어 생성된 메시지일 수 있다. 이는 DU에서는 lower layer 설정인 셀 그룹 설정을 생성해서 CU에게 전달하지만 무선 베어러 및 L3 측정 관련 설정은 CU에서 생성하기 때문에 각 LTM 후보 셀들에 대한 설정 정보를 생성 및 관리 할 때 CU에서 최종적으로 각 정보를 별도로 관리하는 것이 더 효율적일 수 있기 때문이다. 이에 따라 각 LTM 후보 셀들에 대한 설정 정보 리스트(1i-31, 1i-32, 1i-33)에는 LTM 후보 셀들을 지칭할 수 있는 인덱스가 존재한다. 해당 인덱스는 실제 셀 인덱스이거나 논리적으로 새롭게 생성된 LTM 후보 셀의 설정을 지칭하는 인덱스일 수 있다. At step 1i-30, the source cell (1i-02) receives the RRC message generated by the base station CU (1i-03) and transfers it to the terminal (1i-01). The RRC message is configuration information for surrounding candidate cells to which L1/L2-based handover is applied, and may be a message generated by including a list (List of CellGroupConfig, 1i-31) containing cell group configurations (CellGroupConfig) received from each candidate cell (DU), a list (List of RadioBearerConfig, 1i-32) of radio bearer configurations (RadioBearerConfig) generated by the CU applied to the candidate cells, and a list (List of MeasConfig, 1i-33) of L3 measurement-related configurations (MeasConfig) generated by the CU applied to the candidate cells. This is because, although the DU creates the cell group configuration, which is a lower layer configuration, and transfers it to the CU, the radio bearer and L3 measurement-related configurations are created in the CU, so when creating and managing configuration information for each LTM candidate cell, it may be more efficient for the CU to separately manage each piece of information. Accordingly, in the configuration information list (1i-31, 1i-32, 1i-33) for each LTM candidate cell, there is an index that can designate the LTM candidate cells. The index may be an actual cell index or an index that logically designates the configuration of a newly created LTM candidate cell.

1i-35 단계에서 해당 RRC 메시지를 수신한 단말(1i-01)은 RRC 메시지를 디코딩하고 프로세싱하는 절차를 수행한다. 상기 프로세싱에는 수신한 메시지의 ASN.1 디코딩 및 유효성 판정과 설정 내용을 저장 관리하는 방법 등이 포함된다. LTM 후보 셀들에 대한 셀 그룹 설정(CellGroupConfig)들이 포함된 리스트는 LTM 후보 셀들을 지칭할 수 있는 인덱스가 포함된다. 또한, 무선 베어러 설정(RadioBearerConfig)의 리스트와 L3 측정 관련 설정(MeasConfig)의 리스트에는 리스트 내의 각 설정들이 어떤 LTM 후보 셀들에 적용되는지를 지시할 수 있는 후보 셀 지시 인덱스 혹은 비트맵 정보가 포함될 수 있다. 이는 CU에서 생성하는 상기 무선 베어러 설정과 L3 측정 관련 설정은 복수의 LTM 후보 셀들에게도 적용될 수 있기 때문에 예시 1에서의 구조보다 시그널링 오버헤드를 줄일 수 있는 장점이 있다.In step 1i-35, the terminal (1i-01) that receives the RRC message performs a procedure for decoding and processing the RRC message. The processing includes ASN.1 decoding and validity determination of the received message, and a method for storing and managing configuration contents. A list including cell group configurations (CellGroupConfig) for LTM candidate cells includes an index that can designate LTM candidate cells. In addition, the list of radio bearer configurations (RadioBearerConfig) and the list of L3 measurement related configurations (MeasConfig) can include candidate cell indication index or bitmap information that can designate which LTM candidate cells each configuration in the list is applied to. This has an advantage of reducing signaling overhead compared to the structure in Example 1 because the radio bearer configuration and L3 measurement related configuration generated by the CU can be applied to a plurality of LTM candidate cells.

기지국 및 각각의 LTM 후보 셀들은 상기 단계에서 전달된 LTM 후보 셀 설정 정보가 변경된 경우, 이를 업데이트 하는 절차를 수행한다. 본 개시의 예시들에서는 이와 같은 경우, LTM 후보 셀 설정 정보를 효과적으로 업데이트 하기 위한 LTM 후보 셀 RRC 설정의 구조를 제안하고 전체 절차를 제안하는 것을 특징으로 한다. 즉, LTM 후보 셀 RRC 설정의 세부 설정 중, 서빙 셀 및 셀 그룹 설정(CellGroupConfig), 무선 베어러 설정 (RadioBearerConfig), 또는 레이어3 측정 관련 설정(MeasConfig) 중 적어도 한 개 이상의 설정이 변경될 수 있다. The base station and each LTM candidate cell perform a procedure for updating the LTM candidate cell configuration information transmitted in the above step, if it has changed. In the examples of the present disclosure, in such a case, a structure of an LTM candidate cell RRC configuration for effectively updating the LTM candidate cell configuration information is proposed, and the overall procedure is proposed. That is, among the detailed settings of the LTM candidate cell RRC configuration, at least one of the serving cell and cell group configuration (CellGroupConfig), the radio bearer configuration (RadioBearerConfig), or the layer 3 measurement related configuration (MeasConfig) may be changed.

1i-40 단계에서는 LTM 후보 셀 1에서 무선 베어러 설정(RadioBearerConfig)의 변경이 필요한 경우, 기지국의 CU2(1i-06)에서 해당 셀에 대한 무선 베어러 설정 변경을 생성(RadioBearerConfig1, 1i-40)하여 소스 기지국의 CU1(1i-03)에게 전달한다. 소스 기지국의 CU1(1i-03)으로 전달된 설정의 변경은, 1i-45 단계에서 후보 LTM 설정 정보에 포함되어 단말에게 RRC 메시지를 통하여 전달된다. 여기서 RadioBearerConfig1 설정 정보(1i-46)에는 해당 설정 정보가 어떤 LTM 후보 셀에 대한 설정을 지시하는지를 나타내는 인덱스가 포함된다. 또한, 상기 RadioBearerConfig는 delta configuration이 적용될 수 있다. 일 예로 하나의 RadioBearerConfig1 변경을 예시로 하였지만, 해당 단계에서 복수의 RadioBearerConfig가 포함된 리스트가 생성되어 단말(1i-01)에게 전달될 수 있다.In step 1i-40, if a change in radio bearer configuration (RadioBearerConfig) is required in LTM candidate cell 1, CU2 (1i-06) of the base station generates a radio bearer configuration change for the corresponding cell (RadioBearerConfig1, 1i-40) and transmits it to CU1 (1i-03) of the source base station. The change in configuration transmitted to CU1 (1i-03) of the source base station is included in the candidate LTM configuration information in step 1i-45 and transmitted to the terminal through an RRC message. Here, the RadioBearerConfig1 configuration information (1i-46) includes an index indicating which LTM candidate cell the corresponding configuration information indicates the configuration for. In addition, delta configuration can be applied to the RadioBearerConfig. As an example, a change in one RadioBearerConfig1 is described, but a list including multiple RadioBearerConfigs can be generated and transmitted to the terminal (1i-01) in the corresponding step.

1i-45 단계에서는 LTM 후보 셀 1에서 L3 측정관련 설정(MeasConfig)의 변경이 필요한 경우, 기지국의 CU2(1i-06)는 해당 셀에 대한 무선 베어러 설정 변경을 생성(MeasConfig1, 1i-50)하여 소스 기지국의 CU1(1i-03)에게 전달한다. 소스 기지국의 CU1(1i-03)에게 전달된 설정의 변경은, 1i-55 단계에서 후보 LTM 설정 정보에 포함되어, 단말(1i-01)에게 RRC 메시지를 통해 전달된다. 여기서 MeasConfig1 설정 정보(1i-56)에는 해당 설정 정보가 어떤 LTM 후보 셀에 대한 설정을 지시하는지를 나타내는 인덱스가 포함된다. 또한, 상기 MeasConfig는 delta configuration이 적용될 수 있다. 일 예로 하나의 MeasConfig1 변경을 예시로 하였지만, 해당 단계에서 복수의 MeasConfig가 포함된 리스트가 생성되어 단말(1i-01)에게 전달될 수 있다.In step 1i-45, if a change in L3 measurement-related settings (MeasConfig) is required in LTM candidate cell 1, CU2 (1i-06) of the base station generates a radio bearer setting change for the corresponding cell (MeasConfig1, 1i-50) and transmits it to CU1 (1i-03) of the source base station. The setting change transmitted to CU1 (1i-03) of the source base station is included in the candidate LTM setting information in step 1i-55 and transmitted to the terminal (1i-01) via an RRC message. Here, the MeasConfig1 setting information (1i-56) includes an index indicating which LTM candidate cell the setting information indicates. In addition, delta configuration can be applied to the MeasConfig. As an example, a single MeasConfig1 change is exemplified, but a list including multiple MeasConfigs can be generated and transmitted to the terminal (1i-01) in the corresponding step.

상기 LTM 후보 셀에 대한 RadioBearerConfig와 MeasConfig의 변경 절차(기지국의 CU2(1i-06)에서 설정 변경 동작 수행)와는 달리 CellGroupConfig에 대한 설정 변경이 필요한 경우, 각 LTM 후보 셀들(DU 2, 1i-04; DU M, 1i-05)에서 설정 변경을 요청하고 변경된 설정을 기지국의 CU2(1i-03)에게 전달하도록 하는 동작이 필요하다. 이를 위하여, 1i-60 단계에서 LTM 후보 셀 1은 CellGroupConfig1에 대한 설정 변경을 요청하는 메시지를 F1 인터페이스로 기지국의 CU2(1i-06)에게 전달한다. 기지국의 CU2(1i-06)에서는 LTM 후보 셀 1(DU 2, 1i-04)에서 전달된 CellGroupConfig1(1i-66)을 적용하여, 기지국의 CU1(1i-03)에게 전달한다. 1i-65 단계에서는 LTM 후보 셀 1(DU 2, 1i-04)로부터 전달된 CellGroupConfig1(1i-66)을 포함하는 LTM 후보 셀 설정이 단말(1i-01)에게 RRC 메시지를 통하여 전달된다. 여기서 CellGroupConfig1 설정 정보(1i-66)에는 해당 설정 정보가 어떤 LTM 후보 셀에 대한 설정을 지시하는지를 나타내는 인덱스가 포함된다. 또한, 상기 CellGroupConfig는 delta configuration이 적용될 수 있다. 일 예로 하나의 CellGroupConfig1 변경을 예시로 하였지만, 해당 단계에서 복수의 CellGroupConfig가 포함된 리스트가 생성되어 단말(1i-01)에게 전달될 수 있다.Unlike the procedure for changing RadioBearerConfig and MeasConfig for the above LTM candidate cells (performing a configuration change operation in CU2 (1i-06) of the base station), when a configuration change for CellGroupConfig is required, an operation is required to request a configuration change in each LTM candidate cell (DU 2, 1i-04; DU M, 1i-05) and transmit the changed configuration to CU2 (1i-03) of the base station. To this end, in step 1i-60, LTM candidate cell 1 transmits a message requesting a configuration change for CellGroupConfig1 to CU2 (1i-06) of the base station through the F1 interface. CU2 (1i-06) of the base station applies CellGroupConfig1 (1i-66) transmitted from LTM candidate cell 1 (DU 2, 1i-04) and transmits it to CU1 (1i-03) of the base station. In step 1i-65, an LTM candidate cell configuration including CellGroupConfig1 (1i-66) transmitted from LTM candidate cell 1 (DU 2, 1i-04) is transmitted to the terminal (1i-01) via an RRC message. Here, the CellGroupConfig1 configuration information (1i-66) includes an index indicating which LTM candidate cell the corresponding configuration information indicates configuration for. In addition, the CellGroupConfig can have a delta configuration applied. As an example, a single CellGroupConfig1 change is described as an example, but a list including multiple CellGroupConfigs may be generated and transmitted to the terminal (1i-01) in the corresponding step.

1i-70 단계에서 단말(1i-01)은 각 후보 주변 셀들에 대한 L1 측정 및 보고를 수행하게 되고, 이를 수신한 소스 셀은 핸드오버를 결정하면, 1i-75 단계에서 단말(1i-01)에게 L1/L2 핸드오버를 지시한다. 상기 단계에서 핸드오버 지시자를 포함하는 L1/L2 시그널링으로는 MAC CE 및 DCI가 사용될 수 있다. 상기의 1i-70 및 1i-75 단계의 L1/L2 핸드오버를 결정하기 위한 L1 측정값을 수신하고 핸드오버를 결정하는 것은 소스 셀(DU, 1i-02) 혹은 소스 기지국(CU, 1i-03)일 수 있다. 만약, 기지국(CU, 1i-03)가 모든 결정을 할 경우, 소스 셀(DU, 1i-02) 은 단말로부터 수신한 L1 측정값을 전달하고, 기지국(CU, 1i-03)의 핸드오버 결정 지시에 따라 L1/L2 시그널링을 단말에게 전달한다. 하지만, 소스 셀(DU, 1i-02)이 최종 결정을 할 경우, L1 측정값을 기지국에게 전달하지 않고, 이전 기지국으로부터 수신한 각 후보 주변 셀들에 대한 핸드오버 결정을 내리기 위한 측정값 기준(임계값 및 측정값 범위)에 따라 핸드오버를 스스로 결정하고, 이에 따라 L1/L2 시그널링을 단말에게 전달한다. In step 1i-70, the terminal (1i-01) performs L1 measurement and reporting for each candidate surrounding cell, and if the source cell that receives the measurement and reports decides to perform a handover, it instructs the terminal (1i-01) to perform an L1/L2 handover in step 1i-75. In the step, MAC CE and DCI can be used as L1/L2 signaling including a handover indicator. The source cell (DU, 1i-02) or the source base station (CU, 1i-03) can receive the L1 measurement values for determining the L1/L2 handover in steps 1i-70 and 1i-75 and determine the handover. If the base station (CU, 1i-03) makes all decisions, the source cell (DU, 1i-02) transfers the L1 measurement values received from the terminal and transfers L1/L2 signaling to the terminal according to the handover decision instruction of the base station (CU, 1i-03). However, when the source cell (DU, 1i-02) makes the final decision, it does not transmit the L1 measurement value to the base station, but rather decides the handover on its own based on the measurement value criteria (threshold value and measurement value range) for making the handover decision for each candidate neighboring cell received from the previous base station, and transmits L1/L2 signaling to the terminal accordingly.

L1/L2 핸드오버 지시가 단말에게 전달되면, 단말(1i-01)은 1i-80 단계에서 핸드오버 절차를 시작하고, L1/L2 핸드오버를 위한 타이머를 구동한다. 상기 타이머는 LTM을 위해 새롭게 설정된 타이머일 수 있으며, 혹은 기존 핸드오버에 사용되는 T304 타이머를 재사용할 수도 있다. 또한, 단말(1i-01)은 L1/L2 핸드오버가 적용되는 타겟 셀에 대한 설정을 적용한다. 이는 1i-30/1i-45/1i-55/1i-65 단계에서 미리 수신한 주변 셀 설정 중 하나이다. When the L1/L2 handover instruction is transmitted to the terminal, the terminal (1i-01) starts a handover procedure in step 1i-80 and starts a timer for L1/L2 handover. The timer may be a newly set timer for LTM, or may reuse a T304 timer used for an existing handover. In addition, the terminal (1i-01) applies a setting for a target cell to which L1/L2 handover is applied. This is one of the neighboring cell settings received in advance in steps 1i-30/1i-45/1i-55/1i-65.

1i-85 단계에서 적용되는 설정에 따라 단말(1i-01)은 해당 타겟 셀에 대해 랜덤 액세스가 필요한 경우 랜덤 액세스를 수행하고, 랜덤 액세스가 지시되지 않거나 필요하지 않은 경우 (상향링크 동기가 이미 수행되거나 맞춰져 있는 경우)에는 랜덤 액세스 절차를 생략한다. Depending on the settings applied in step 1i-85, the terminal (1i-01) performs random access when random access is required for the target cell, and skips the random access procedure when random access is not indicated or required (when uplink synchronization has already been performed or aligned).

1i-90 단계에서 단말(1i-01)은 타겟 셀과 핸드오버 완료 절차를 수행한다. 해당 절차는 핸드오버 완료 지시를 하는 방법에 따라 달라질 수 있으며, 타겟 셀의 설정을 RRC 메시지 레벨로 수신한 경우 RRCReconfiugrationComplete 메시지를 전달하는 과정일 수 있으나, 셀 레벨 혹은 셀 그룹 레벨의 설정을 수신한 경우에는 새로운 핸드오버 완료 지시 메시지(새로운 RRC 메시지 혹은 MAC CE)가 해당 절차를 대신할 수 있다.In step 1i-90, the terminal (1i-01) performs a handover completion procedure with the target cell. The procedure may vary depending on the method of indicating the handover completion, and may be a process of transmitting an RRCReconfiugrationComplete message if the target cell configuration is received at the RRC message level, but if the cell level or cell group level configuration is received, a new handover completion indication message (new RRC message or MAC CE) may replace the procedure.

1i-95 단계에서 LTM이 완료된 이후 타겟 셀(DU2, 1i-04)은 기지국(CU, 1i-03)에게 LTM 절차가 완료되어 단말(1i-01)이 해당 셀에 성공적으로 RRC 연결을 수행하였음을 알린다. 이후 기지국(CU, 1i-03)은 소스 셀(1i-02)에 해당 단말에 대한 연결을 종료할 것을 지시하고, UE context를 release 할 것을 지시한다.After LTM is completed at step 1i-95, the target cell (DU2, 1i-04) informs the base station (CU, 1i-03) that the LTM procedure is completed and the terminal (1i-01) has successfully performed RRC connection to the corresponding cell. Thereafter, the base station (CU, 1i-03) instructs the source cell (1i-02) to terminate the connection to the corresponding terminal and instructs it to release the UE context.

도면에서는 생략되어 있지만, 기준 셀 및 기준 셀의 설정의 변경이 필요한 경우, 기지국 CU와 주변 셀들 사이의 F1 인터페이스 및 기지국 CU1과 기지국 CU 2사이의 Xn 인터페이스 메시지들로 설정 관련 동작이 업데이트될 수 있다. 특히 기준 셀의 설정이 변경되는 경우, 앞서 설명한 LTM 후보 셀 설정 절차가 반복되어 기준 셀 설정 변경 및 LTM 후보 셀 설정 변경 절차가 수행되고, 단말에게 변경된 설정 정보가 전달된다. 또한, 본 도면에서는 생략되었지만, L1/L2 기반의 핸드오버가 적용되는 주변 후보 셀들을 동적으로 지시하기 위한 새로운 MAC CE 및 DCI가 도입되어, 동적으로 유효한 설정이 지시 혹은 설정 해제(미리 전달한 L1/L2 기반 핸드오버 설정 release)될 수도 있다. 혹은 관련 동작은 기지국이 내부적으로 수행하고 단말에게 별도의 시그널링을 전달하지 않을 수 있다.Although omitted in the drawing, when a change in a reference cell and its configuration is required, configuration-related operations may be updated with messages in the F1 interface between the base station CU and neighboring cells and in the Xn interface between the base station CU1 and base station CU 2. In particular, when the configuration of the reference cell is changed, the LTM candidate cell configuration procedure described above is repeated to perform the reference cell configuration change and LTM candidate cell configuration change procedures, and the changed configuration information is transmitted to the terminal. In addition, although omitted in the drawing, new MAC CE and DCI may be introduced to dynamically indicate neighboring candidate cells to which L1/L2-based handover is applied, so that dynamically valid configurations may be indicated or released (previously transmitted L1/L2-based handover configurations may be released). Alternatively, the related operations may be performed internally by the base station without transmitting separate signaling to the terminal.

본 개시의 상기 예시들에 추가적으로, 만약 하나의 DU 내에 복수의 LTM 후보 셀들이 존재하는 경우에는, 해당 셀들에게 공통으로 적용되는 설정들이 중복 설정됨으로써 비효율적일 수 있다. 이는 시그널링 부담과, 동일 설정을 중복 처리함에 따른 단말의 프로세싱 및 버퍼 능력의 부담으로 이어진다. 이를 위해, CellGroupConfig내에 존재하는 다음과 같은 설정들에 대해서 기준이 되는 설정을 제공하고, 해당 설정과 동일한 설정이 적용되는 LTM 후보 셀 및 서빙 셀에 대해서는 기준 인덱스를 지시해서 동일한 설정을 적용할 수 있다. In addition to the above examples of the present disclosure, if there are multiple LTM candidate cells in one DU, the settings commonly applied to the cells may be duplicated, which may be inefficient. This leads to a signaling burden and a burden on the processing and buffer capacity of the terminal due to duplicate processing of the same settings. To this end, a reference setting is provided for the following settings existing in CellGroupConfig, and a reference index is indicated for LTM candidate cells and serving cells to which the same setting is applied, so that the same setting can be applied.

- 논리 채널 설정 (Logical channel configuration)- Logical channel configuration

- RLC 베어러 설정 (RLC bearer configuration)- RLC bearer configuration

- MAC 설정 (MAC cell group configuration)- MAC cell group configuration

하기의 [표 6]에서처럼, ASN.1 에 해당하는 설정을 참고한다.Refer to the settings corresponding to ASN.1 as shown in [Table 6] below.

Figure PCTKR2024095075-appb-img-000006
Figure PCTKR2024095075-appb-img-000006

만약, 기준 설정 인덱스(reference configuration ID)가 CellGroupConfig IE 내에 존재하면, 단말은 해당 기준 설정 인덱스가 지시하는 CellGroupConfig IE내의 설정을 적용한다. 하기의 간단한 수도 코드를 참고한다.If the reference configuration index (reference configuration ID) exists in the CellGroupConfig IE, the terminal applies the settings in the CellGroupConfig IE indicated by the reference configuration index. See the simple pseudo code below.

CellGroupConfig IE CellGroupConfig IE

{{

ID AID A

RLC bearer config, LCH config, MAC config are present RLC bearer config, LCH config, MAC config are present

SpCell XSpCell X

} }

 CellGroupConfig IE CellGroupConfig IE

{{

ID BID B

Reference ID AReference ID A

RLC bearer config, LCH config, MAC config are absent RLC bearer config, LCH config, MAC config are absent

SpCell YSpCell Y

}}

즉, CellGroupConfig ID B에 존재하는 셀들은 reference ID A가 지시되었기에 CellGroupConfig ID A에 존재하는 RLC bearer config, LCH config, MAC config 설정을 적용한다.That is, cells existing in CellGroupConfig ID B apply the RLC bearer config, LCH config, and MAC config settings existing in CellGroupConfig ID A because reference ID A was indicated.

도 10은 본 개시의 예시들에 적용되고, L1/L2 기반의 빔 변경 및 핸드오버를 수행하는 전체 단말 동작을 도시한 도면이다. 특히 본 개시에서는, 단말이 RRC 설정을 통해 L1/L2 기반의 이동이 지시된 이후에 적용되는 주변 셀에서의 설정 정보를 delta configuration으로 수신하였을 때의 동작을 특징으로 한다.FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating the overall terminal operation for performing L1/L2-based beam change and handover, which is applied to examples of the present disclosure. In particular, the present disclosure features an operation when the terminal receives configuration information from a neighboring cell as a delta configuration after L1/L2-based movement is instructed through RRC configuration.

1j-05 단계에서 연결 상태의 단말은, 서빙 셀로부터 RRC 재설정 메시지를 통해 L1/L2 기반의 이동이 지시된 이후에 적용되는 주변 셀에서의 설정 정보를 수신할 수 있다. 자세한 설정 방법 및 내용은 도면 6, 7, 8, 9에서 상술한 내용을 참고한다. 또한, 생략되었지만, 단말은 상기 RRC 설정 정보 이전에, 기지국에게 주변 셀들에 대한 layer 3 측정값을 보고하는 동작을 수행한다. 특히 1j-05 단계에서 수신한 L1/L2 기반의 이동이 지시된 이후에 적용되는 주변 셀에서의 설정 정보는 하나의 기준 셀에 대한 설정을 기반으로 delta configuration이 적용되어 전달되는 것을 특징으로 한다. In step 1j-05, a terminal in a connected state can receive configuration information in a neighboring cell that is applied after L1/L2-based movement is instructed through an RRC reconfiguration message from a serving cell. For detailed configuration methods and contents, refer to the contents described above in drawings 6, 7, 8, and 9. In addition, although omitted, the terminal performs an operation of reporting layer 3 measurement values for neighboring cells to the base station before the RRC configuration information. In particular, the configuration information in a neighboring cell that is applied after L1/L2-based movement is instructed received in step 1j-05 is characterized in that a delta configuration is applied and transmitted based on the configuration for one reference cell.

단말은 미리 알려진 혹은 RRC 설정에서 지시된 기준 셀 및 기준 셀에 대한 설정 정보가 어떤 것인지를 알 수 있으며, 기준 셀이 아닌 다른 주변 셀들에 대한 설정은 기준 셀 대비 차이가 나는(상이한) 부분만 설정이 되기 때문에, 시그널링 오버헤드가 적다. 단말은, 수신한 주변 셀들에 대한 설정을 해당 단계에서 기준 셀의 설정 기반으로 디코딩 하여, 실제 적용되는 설정(즉, 기준 셀 기반으로 delta configuration된 설정을 기준 셀 설정을 참고하여 Full configuration으로 저장 하는 동작)을 별도의 버퍼 및 리스트에 저장 및 관리할 수 있다. 혹은 수신한 설정을 기준셀 기준으로 디코딩하여 실제 적용되는 설정을 저장 및 관리하지 않고, 수신한 RRC 설정 그대로 버퍼에 저장하고 관리할 수도 있다. 해당 단계에서 주변 셀들에 대한 설정을 기준 셀 기반으로 디코딩하여 실제 적용되는 설정을 저장함으로써 생기는 이점은, 실제 L1/L2 기반의 핸드오버가 지시되었을 경우, 해당 셀에 대한 핸드오버를 바로 적용할 수 있게 되어 추가적인 지연시간이 없다는 점이다.The terminal can know what the reference cell and the configuration information for the reference cell are, which are known in advance or indicated in the RRC configuration, and since only the parts that are different (independent) from the reference cell are set for the settings for neighboring cells other than the reference cell, the signaling overhead is small. The terminal can decode the settings for the received neighboring cells based on the configuration of the reference cell at that stage, and store and manage the actually applied settings (i.e., the operation of saving the delta configured settings based on the reference cell as the full configuration by referring to the reference cell configuration) in a separate buffer and list. Alternatively, the terminal can store and manage the received RRC settings as they are in the buffer without decoding the received settings based on the reference cell and storing and managing the actually applied settings. The advantage of decoding the settings for the neighboring cells based on the reference cell at that stage and storing the actually applied settings is that when an actual L1/L2-based handover is indicated, the handover for the corresponding cell can be applied immediately, so there is no additional delay time.

단말은 1j-10 단계에서 기지국으로부터 특정 LTM 후보 셀들에 대한 RRC 설정 정보에 대한 변경을 포함하는 RRC 메시지를 수신할 수 있다. 상기 RRC 메시지에는 LTM 후보 셀 별로 변경이 적용되는 셀 그룹 설정, 무선 베어러 설정, L3 측정 관련 설정 중 적어도 한 개 이상을 포함하는 설정 업데이트가 포함될 수 있다. 단말은 상기 메시지를 수신하면, delta configuration 기반으로 해당 설정을 적용하여 LTM 후보 셀들에 대한 설정을 업데이트 한다.The terminal may receive an RRC message including a change in RRC configuration information for specific LTM candidate cells from the base station in step 1j-10. The RRC message may include a configuration update including at least one of a cell group configuration, a radio bearer configuration, and an L3 measurement-related configuration that are applied to each LTM candidate cell. Upon receiving the message, the terminal updates the configuration for the LTM candidate cells by applying the corresponding configuration based on the delta configuration.

단말은 1j-15 단계에서 서빙 셀과의 연결 상태를 유지하면서 candidate 주변 셀에 연관된 L1 measurement를 수행하고, 미리 설정된 L1 measurement reporting 설정 방법에 따라 해당 측정 결과를 서빙 셀에게 보고한다. 서빙 셀은 수신한 측정 결과를 바탕으로 단말의 빔 변경 및 핸드오버 여부를 결정할 수 있으며, 서빙 셀의 특정 빔에서 주변 셀의 특정 빔으로의 변경이 필요하다고 판단되면, 1j-20 단계에서 L1/L2 시그널링을 통해 단말의 핸드오버 및 빔 변경을 지시한다. 상기 L1/L2 시그널링이 핸드오버도 트리거링 할 수 있다는 점에서 기존 동작과 차별점을 가진다. 본 도면에서는 상기의 L1/L2 시그널링이 MAC CE와 DCI일 경우이며, 해당 MAC CE에서 주변 셀의 특정 빔 및 서빙 셀 변경을 지시하는 정보가 모두 지시(MAC CE가 하나의 빔만을 지시하는 경우)되거나, MAC CE에서 주변 셀의 특정 복수의 빔이 지시되고, 1j-20 단계에 이어서 전달되는 DCI에서, MAC CE에서 활성화된 주변 셀의 복수의 빔 중에서 하나를 선택하여 핸드오버를 지시할 수 있다. 즉 1j-25 단계는 생략될 수도 있다.The terminal performs L1 measurement related to a candidate neighboring cell while maintaining a connection state with the serving cell in step 1j-15, and reports the measurement result to the serving cell according to a preset L1 measurement reporting setting method. The serving cell can determine whether to change the beam of the terminal and perform a handover based on the received measurement result, and if it is determined that a change from a specific beam of the serving cell to a specific beam of the neighboring cell is necessary, it instructs the handover and beam change of the terminal through L1/L2 signaling in step 1j-20. It is different from the existing operation in that the L1/L2 signaling can also trigger a handover. In this drawing, the L1/L2 signaling is a case where the MAC CE and DCI are used, and all information indicating a specific beam of the neighboring cell and a serving cell change are indicated in the MAC CE (when the MAC CE indicates only one beam), or specific multiple beams of the neighboring cell are indicated in the MAC CE, and in the DCI transmitted subsequent to step 1j-20, one of the multiple beams of the neighboring cell activated in the MAC CE can be selected to instruct a handover. That is, steps 1j-25 may be omitted.

1j-30 단계에서 단말은 1j-20 단계와 1j-25 단계에서 수신한 MAC CE 및 DCI 시그널링으로부터 핸드오버 지시 여부를 체크하고, 이후 동작을 달리한다. 1j-30 단계에서 수신한 MAC CE 및 DCI에서 핸드오버를 지시하는 경우(MAC CE 자체에서 핸드오버를 지시하거나 MAC CE에서 복수의 빔을 활성화하고 DCI에서 해당 빔 중 하나를 지시하면서 핸드오버를 지시하는 경우), 단말은 1j-35 단계에서 지시된 TCI state와 연관된 셀로 핸드오버를 수행하고, 핸드오버 수행에 따라 1j-05 및 1j-10 단계에서 수신한 주변 셀에 대한 pre-configuration으로 저장하고 있던, 해당 타겟 셀에 대한 설정도 같이 적용하고, 지시된 빔을 사용해서 데이터 송수신을 수행한다.In step 1j-30, the terminal checks whether a handover is indicated from the MAC CE and DCI signaling received in steps 1j-20 and 1j-25, and performs different operations thereafter. If the MAC CE and DCI received in step 1j-30 indicate a handover (if the MAC CE itself indicates a handover or if the MAC CE activates multiple beams and indicates a handover while indicating one of the corresponding beams in the DCI), the terminal performs a handover to a cell associated with the TCI state indicated in step 1j-35, and, according to the handover, also applies the settings for the corresponding target cell that were stored as pre-configuration for neighboring cells received in steps 1j-05 and 1j-10, and performs data transmission and reception using the indicated beam.

만약 1j-30 단계에서 수신한 MAC CE 및 DCI에서 핸드오버를 지시하지 않는 경우(MAC CE에서 핸드오버 여부를 지시하지 않는 경우나 DCI에서 핸드오버가 지시되지 않는 경우), 단말은 1j-40 단계에서 현재 서빙 셀과의 연결을 유지하고, 지시된 셀의 TCI state로 빔 변경 후 해당 빔을 통해 데이터 송수신을 수행한다. 빔 변경 이후 해당 빔의 dedicated 채널(PDCCH/ PDSCH 및 PUCCH/ PUSCH)를 통한 데이터 송수신을 수행한다. If the MAC CE and DCI received in step 1j-30 do not indicate a handover (if the MAC CE does not indicate whether to perform a handover or if the DCI does not indicate a handover), the terminal maintains the connection with the current serving cell in step 1j-40, changes the beam to the TCI state of the indicated cell, and then transmits and receives data through the corresponding beam. After the beam change, data is transmitted and received through the dedicated channels (PDCCH/PDSCH and PUCCH/PUSCH) of the corresponding beam.

1j-45 단계에서 주변 셀들에 대한 L1 측정 및 보고와 RRM (Radio resource management) 절차, 즉 L3 measurement 및 채널 보고 동작을 수행한다. 이 단계에서, 서빙 셀이 단말의 L1 측정 보고 혹은 L3 measurement 보고에 기반하여, 단말에게 주변 셀로의 핸드오버가 필요하다 판단되면, 서빙 셀의 변경을 위한 핸드오버를 지시할 수 있다. In step 1j-45, L1 measurement and reporting for neighboring cells and RRM (Radio resource management) procedures, i.e. L3 measurement and channel reporting operations are performed. In this step, if the serving cell determines that a handover to a neighboring cell is necessary for the terminal based on the L1 measurement report or L3 measurement report of the terminal, it can instruct a handover for changing the serving cell.

1j-50 단계에서 핸드오버 명령을 L1/L2 시그널링 혹은 RRC 메시지로 수신할 수 있으며, 이를 수신한 단말이 이미 주변 셀로 빔 변경을 수행 중이고 해당 셀로의 데이터 송수신을 수행 중인 경우, 랜덤 액세스 관련 동작이 생략될 수 있다. 단말은 핸드오버 지시에 따라 서빙 셀을 변경하고 이전 서빙 셀의 설정을 release한다.In step 1j-50, a handover command can be received as L1/L2 signaling or an RRC message, and if the terminal receiving it is already performing beam changing to a neighboring cell and performing data transmission and reception to the cell, random access related operations can be omitted. The terminal changes the serving cell according to the handover instruction and releases the settings of the previous serving cell.

도 11은 본 개시의 예시들에 적용되는 기지국 동작을 도시한 도면이다.FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating base station operations applied to examples of the present disclosure.

1k-05 단계에서 기지국은 단말로부터 L3 측정값 보고를 수신하고, 주변 주파수 및 셀들에 대한 단말의 측정값을 바탕으로 단말이 핸드오버가 필요한 상태인지 여부와 어떤 셀들이 핸드오버 후보 셀들인지 등을 확인한다. At step 1k-05, the base station receives an L3 measurement value report from the terminal, and based on the terminal's measurement values for surrounding frequencies and cells, determines whether the terminal requires handover and which cells are handover candidate cells.

1k-10 단계에서 기지국은 주변 셀들에게 L1/L2 기반 핸드오버를 위한 설정 정보 요청과 해당 셀들로부터 응답을 수신한다. 본 개시에서는 해당 단계에서 주변 셀들에게 delta configuration 기반으로 RRC 설정 정보를 수신하는 것을 특징으로 하며, 이때 기준 셀 및 기준 셀 설정 정보를 어떤 것으로 하는지에 따라 예시들을 구성하였고, 관련 F1 인터페이스를 통한 메시지 교환 방법 등은 도면 1f와 1g, 1h, 1i에서 자세히 설명하였다. 즉, 기지국은 기준 셀 및 기준 셀 설정을 주변 셀들에게 알려주고, 해당 기준 셀 설정을 기반으로 다른 주변 셀들에 대한 L1/L2 기반 핸드오버를 위한 설정 정보를 수신하게 된다. In step 1k-10, the base station requests configuration information for L1/L2-based handover to neighboring cells and receives responses from the corresponding cells. The present disclosure is characterized in that RRC configuration information is received from neighboring cells based on delta configuration in the step, and examples are configured according to what a reference cell and reference cell configuration information are, and a message exchange method through a related F1 interface, etc. are described in detail in drawings 1f, 1g, 1h, and 1i. That is, the base station notifies neighboring cells of a reference cell and reference cell configuration, and receives configuration information for L1/L2-based handover for other neighboring cells based on the reference cell configuration.

1k-15 단계에서 기지국은 연결 상태의 단말에게, 상기 1k-10 단계에서 수신한 주변 셀 설정 정보를 포함하여 생성된 RRC 설정 메시지를 전달한다. 즉, 기지국은 서빙 셀로부터 RRC 재설정 메시지를 통해 L1/L2 기반의 이동이 지시된 이후에 적용되는 주변 셀에서의 설정 정보를 단말에게 전달한다. 자세한 설정 방법 및 내용은 도면 1f와 1g, 1h, 1i에서 상술하였다. 즉, 기지국은 기준 셀 및 기준 셀 설정을 주변 셀들에게 알려주고, 해당 기준 셀 설정을 기반으로 다른 주변 셀들에 대한 L1/L2 기반 핸드오버를 위한 설정 정보를 수신하게 된다. 또한, 해당 단계에서 기지국은 다른 기지국 혹은 기지국 내의 DU 및 LTM 후보 서빙 셀로부터 LTM 후보 셀들에 대한 특정 설정 정보의 변경이 있는 경우, 이를 업데이트 하기 위한 설정을 단말에게 전달한다.In step 1k-15, the base station transmits to the terminal in the connected state an RRC configuration message generated including the neighboring cell configuration information received in step 1k-10. That is, the base station transmits to the terminal the configuration information in the neighboring cell applied after L1/L2-based movement is instructed from the serving cell through an RRC reconfiguration message. Detailed configuration methods and contents are described in detail in drawings 1f, 1g, 1h, and 1i. That is, the base station informs neighboring cells of the reference cell and the reference cell configuration, and receives configuration information for L1/L2-based handover to other neighboring cells based on the reference cell configuration. In addition, in the step, the base station transmits to the terminal the configuration for updating specific configuration information for LTM candidate cells when there is a change in the specific configuration information from another base station or a DU and LTM candidate serving cell within the base station.

이후 1k-20 단계에서 기지국은 단말로부터 L1 measurement 측정값을 수신하며, 이때 측정값은 L1/L2 기반의 이동성을 지원하는 주변 셀(non-serving cell)에 대한 측정 값일 수 있다. 서빙 셀은 수신한 측정 결과를 바탕으로 단말의 빔 변경 여부를 결정할 수 있으며, 서빙 셀의 특정 빔에서 주변 셀의 특정 빔으로의 변경이 필요하다고 판단되면, 1k-25 단계에서 L1/L2 시그널링을 통해 단말의 빔 변경을 지시한다. 상기의 L1/L2 시그널링은 MAC CE 혹은 DCI 일 수 있으며, 주변 셀의 특정 빔으로의 변경을 지시하는 정보가 포함된다. 또한, 해당 단계에서 L1/L2 시그널링을 통해 핸드오버도 동시에 지시할 수 있다. 핸드오버가 동시에 지시되는 경우에는, 서빙 셀은 핸드오버 절차를 수행하고, 타겟 셀과의 핸드오버가 완료될 때 단말 context를 삭제하고 연결을 release 한다. 이때, 핸드오버를 수행할지 여부를 결정하기 위한 측정값이 L1 측정인 것을 특징으로 한다.Thereafter, in step 1k-20, the base station receives an L1 measurement value from the terminal, and the measurement value may be a measurement value for a neighboring cell (non-serving cell) supporting L1/L2-based mobility. The serving cell may determine whether to change the beam of the terminal based on the received measurement result, and if it is determined that a change from a specific beam of the serving cell to a specific beam of the neighboring cell is necessary, it instructs the terminal to change the beam through L1/L2 signaling in step 1k-25. The L1/L2 signaling may be MAC CE or DCI, and includes information instructing a change to a specific beam of the neighboring cell. In addition, a handover may also be simultaneously instructed through L1/L2 signaling in the corresponding step. When a handover is simultaneously instructed, the serving cell performs a handover procedure, and when the handover with the target cell is completed, deletes the terminal context and releases the connection. At this time, it is characterized in that the measurement value for determining whether to perform the handover is an L1 measurement.

상기의 L1/L2 시그널링이 핸드오버 절차를 포함하지 않는 경우에는, 1k-30 단계에서 단말과 연결 상태를 유지한다. 해당 단계에서 단말은 미리 설정된 주변 셀에 대한 설정 정보를 적용하여 dedicated 채널(PDCCH/ PDSCH 및 PUCCH/ PUSCH)를 통한 데이터 송수신을 수행한다. 단말은 주변 셀과의 링크에서 현재 서빙 셀로의 복귀도 할 수 있다. 1k-30 단계에서 단말과 연결 상태에서 추가적인 L1/L3 measurement 보고를 수신할 수 있으며, 서빙 셀이 주변 셀로의 핸드오버가 필요하다고 판단하면 단말에게 핸드오버 메시지를 지시해서 서빙 셀 변경을 지시할 수 있다. If the above L1/L2 signaling does not include a handover procedure, the terminal maintains a connection state in step 1k-30. In this step, the terminal performs data transmission and reception through dedicated channels (PDCCH/PDSCH and PUCCH/PUSCH) by applying configuration information for preset neighboring cells. The terminal can also return to the current serving cell on the link with the neighboring cell. In step 1k-30, the terminal can receive additional L1/L3 measurement reports while in the connection state with the terminal, and if the serving cell determines that a handover to the neighboring cell is necessary, the terminal can instruct a handover message to instruct a change of serving cell.

1k-35 단계에서 단말이 핸드오버 지시에 따라 단말은 서빙 셀을 변경하고 나면 이전 서빙 셀의 설정을 release한다.At step 1k-35, when the terminal changes the serving cell according to the handover instruction, the terminal releases the settings of the previous serving cell.

도 12는 본 개시를 적용한 단말의 내부 구조를 도시하는 블록도이다.Fig. 12 is a block diagram illustrating the internal structure of a terminal to which the present disclosure is applied.

도 12를 참고하면, 상기 단말은 RF(Radio Frequency)처리부(1l-10), 기저대역(baseband)처리부(1l-20), 저장부(1l-30), 제어부(1l-40)를 포함한다.Referring to FIG. 12, the terminal includes an RF (Radio Frequency) processing unit (1l-10), a baseband processing unit (1l-20), a storage unit (1l-30), and a control unit (1l-40).

상기 RF처리부(1l-10)는 신호의 대역 변환, 증폭 등 무선 채널을 통해 신호를 송수신하기 위한 기능을 수행한다. 즉, 상기 RF처리부(1l-10)는 상기 기저대역처리부(1l-20)로부터 제공되는 기저대역 신호를 RF 대역 신호로 상향 변환한 후 안테나를 통해 송신하고, 상기 안테나를 통해 수신되는 RF 대역 신호를 기저대역 신호로 하향 변환한다. 예를 들어, 상기 RF처리부(1l-10)는 송신 필터, 수신 필터, 증폭기, 믹서(mixer), 오실레이터(oscillator), DAC(digital to analog convertor), ADC(analog to digital convertor) 등을 포함할 수 있다. 상기 도면에서, 하나의 안테나만이 도시되었으나, 상기 단말은 다수의 안테나들을 구비할 수 있다. 또한, 상기 RF처리부(1l-10)는 다수의 RF 체인들을 포함할 수 있다. 나아가, 상기 RF처리부(1l-10)는 빔포밍(beamforming)을 수행할 수 있다. 상기 빔포밍을 위해, 상기 RF처리부(1l-10)는 다수의 안테나들 또는 안테나 요소(element)들을 통해 송수신되는 신호들 각각의 위상 및 크기를 조절할 수 있다. 또한 상기 RF 처리부는 MIMO를 수행할 수 있으며, MIMO 동작 수행 시 여러 개의 레이어를 수신할 수 있다. The RF processing unit (1l-10) above performs functions for transmitting and receiving signals through a wireless channel, such as signal band conversion and amplification. That is, the RF processing unit (1l-10) up-converts a baseband signal provided from the baseband processing unit (1l-20) into an RF band signal and transmits it through an antenna, and down-converts an RF band signal received through the antenna into a baseband signal. For example, the RF processing unit (1l-10) may include a transmission filter, a reception filter, an amplifier, a mixer, an oscillator, a DAC (digital to analog convertor), an ADC (analog to digital convertor), etc. In the drawing, only one antenna is shown, but the terminal may be equipped with multiple antennas. In addition, the RF processing unit (1l-10) may include multiple RF chains. Furthermore, the RF processing unit (1l-10) may perform beamforming. For the above beamforming, the RF processing unit (1l-10) can adjust the phase and size of each signal transmitted and received through multiple antennas or antenna elements. In addition, the RF processing unit can perform MIMO and receive multiple layers when performing a MIMO operation.

상기 기저대역처리부(1l-20)은 시스템의 물리 계층 규격에 따라 기저대역 신호 및 비트열 간 변환 기능을 수행한다. 예를 들어, 데이터 송신 시, 상기 기저대역처리부(1l-20)은 송신 비트열을 부호화 및 변조함으로써 복소 심벌들을 생성한다. 또한, 데이터 수신 시, 상기 기저대역처리부(1l-20)은 상기 RF처리부(1l-10)로부터 제공되는 기저대역 신호를 복조 및 복호화를 통해 수신 비트열을 복원한다. 예를 들어, OFDM(orthogonal frequency division multiplexing) 방식에 따르는 경우, 데이터 송신 시, 상기 기저대역처리부(1l-20)는 송신 비트열을 부호화 및 변조함으로써 복소 심벌들을 생성하고, 상기 복소 심벌들을 부반송파들에 매핑한 후, IFFT(inverse fast Fourier transform) 연산 및 CP(cyclic prefix) 삽입을 통해 OFDM 심벌들을 구성한다. 또한, 데이터 수신 시, 상기 기저대역처리부(1l-20)은 상기 RF처리부(1l-10)로부터 제공되는 기저대역 신호를 OFDM 심벌 단위로 분할하고, FFT(fast Fourier transform) 연산을 통해 부반송파들에 매핑된 신호들을 복원한 후, 복조 및 복호화를 통해 수신 비트열을 복원한다.The above baseband processing unit (1l-20) performs a conversion function between a baseband signal and a bit stream according to the physical layer specifications of the system. For example, when transmitting data, the baseband processing unit (1l-20) generates complex symbols by encoding and modulating a transmission bit stream. In addition, when receiving data, the baseband processing unit (1l-20) restores a reception bit stream by demodulating and decoding a baseband signal provided from the RF processing unit (1l-10). For example, in the case of following the OFDM (orthogonal frequency division multiplexing) method, when transmitting data, the baseband processing unit (1l-20) generates complex symbols by encoding and modulating a transmission bit stream, maps the complex symbols to subcarriers, and then configures OFDM symbols by performing an IFFT (inverse fast Fourier transform) operation and CP (cyclic prefix) insertion. In addition, when receiving data, the baseband processing unit (1l-20) divides the baseband signal provided from the RF processing unit (1l-10) into OFDM symbol units, restores signals mapped to subcarriers through an FFT (fast Fourier transform) operation, and then restores the received bit string through demodulation and decoding.

상기 기저대역처리부(1l-20) 및 상기 RF처리부(1l-10)는 상술한 바와 같이 신호를 송신 및 수신한다. 이에 따라, 상기 기저대역처리부(1l-20) 및 상기 RF처리부(1l-10)는 송신부, 수신부, 송수신부 또는 통신부로 지칭될 수 있다. 나아가, 상기 기저대역처리부(1l-20) 및 상기 RF처리부(1l-10) 중 적어도 하나는 서로 다른 다수의 무선 접속 기술들을 지원하기 위해 다수의 통신 모듈들을 포함할 수 있다. 또한, 상기 기저대역처리부(1l-20) 및 상기 RF처리부(1l-10) 중 적어도 하나는 서로 다른 주파수 대역의 신호들을 처리하기 위해 서로 다른 통신 모듈들을 포함할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 상기 서로 다른 무선 접속 기술들은 무선 랜(예: IEEE 802.11), 셀룰러 망(예: LTE) 등을 포함할 수 있다. 또한, 상기 서로 다른 주파수 대역들은 극고단파(SHF:super high frequency)(예: 2.NRHz, NRhz) 대역, mm파(millimeter wave)(예: 60GHz) 대역을 포함할 수 있다.The baseband processing unit (1l-20) and the RF processing unit (1l-10) transmit and receive signals as described above. Accordingly, the baseband processing unit (1l-20) and the RF processing unit (1l-10) may be referred to as a transmitter, a receiver, a transceiver, or a communication unit. Furthermore, at least one of the baseband processing unit (1l-20) and the RF processing unit (1l-10) may include a plurality of communication modules to support a plurality of different wireless access technologies. In addition, at least one of the baseband processing unit (1l-20) and the RF processing unit (1l-10) may include different communication modules to process signals of different frequency bands. For example, the different wireless access technologies may include a wireless LAN (e.g., IEEE 802.11), a cellular network (e.g., LTE), etc. Additionally, the different frequency bands may include super high frequency (SHF) (e.g., 2.NRHz, NRhz) bands, millimeter wave (mm wave) (e.g., 60GHz) bands.

상기 저장부(1l-30)는 상기 단말의 동작을 위한 기본 프로그램, 응용 프로그램, 설정 정보 등의 데이터를 저장한다. 특히, 상기 저장부(1l-30)는 제2무선 접속 기술을 이용하여 무선 통신을 수행하는 제2접속 노드에 관련된 정보를 저장할 수 있다. 그리고, 상기 저장부(1l-30)는 상기 제어부(1l-40)의 요청에 따라 저장된 데이터를 제공한다.The above storage unit (1l-30) stores data such as basic programs, application programs, and setting information for the operation of the terminal. In particular, the storage unit (1l-30) can store information related to a second access node that performs wireless communication using the second wireless access technology. In addition, the storage unit (1l-30) provides stored data according to a request from the control unit (1l-40).

상기 제어부(1l-40)는 상기 단말의 전반적인 동작들을 제어한다. 예를 들어, 상기 제어부(1l-40)는 상기 기저대역처리부(1l-20) 및 상기 RF처리부(1l-10)을 통해 신호를 송수신한다. 또한, 상기 제어부(1l-40)는 상기 저장부(1l-30)에 데이터를 기록하고, 읽는다. 이를 위해, 상기 제어부(1l-40)는 적어도 하나의 프로세서(processor)를 포함할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 상기 제어부(1l-40)는 통신을 위한 제어를 수행하는 CP(communication processor) 및 응용 프로그램 등 상위 계층을 제어하는 AP(application processor)를 포함할 수 있다. The above control unit (1l-40) controls the overall operations of the terminal. For example, the control unit (1l-40) transmits and receives signals through the baseband processing unit (1l-20) and the RF processing unit (1l-10). In addition, the control unit (1l-40) records and reads data in the storage unit (1l-30). For this purpose, the control unit (1l-40) may include at least one processor. For example, the control unit (1l-40) may include a CP (communication processor) that performs control for communication and an AP (application processor) that controls upper layers such as application programs.

도 13은 본 개시에 따른 기지국의 구성을 나타낸 블록도이다.Figure 13 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a base station according to the present disclosure.

도 12를 참조하면, 상기 기지국은 RF처리부(1m-10), 기저대역처리부(1m-20), 백홀통신부(1m-30), 저장부(1m-40), 제어부(1m-50)를 포함하여 구성된다.Referring to FIG. 12, the base station is configured to include an RF processing unit (1m-10), a baseband processing unit (1m-20), a backhaul communication unit (1m-30), a storage unit (1m-40), and a control unit (1m-50).

상기 RF처리부(1m-10)는 신호의 대역 변환, 증폭 등 무선 채널을 통해 신호를 송수신하기 위한 기능을 수행한다. 즉, 상기 RF처리부(1m-10)는 상기 기저대역처리부(1m-20)로부터 제공되는 기저대역 신호를 RF 대역 신호로 상향변환한 후 안테나를 통해 송신하고, 상기 안테나를 통해 수신되는 RF 대역 신호를 기저대역 신호로 하향 변환한다. 예를 들어, 상기 RF처리부(1m-10)는 송신 필터, 수신 필터, 증폭기, 믹서, 오실레이터, DAC, ADC 등을 포함할 수 있다. 상기 도면에서, 하나의 안테나만이 도시되었으나, 상기 제1접속 노드는 다수의 안테나들을 구비할 수 있다. 또한, 상기 RF처리부(1m-10)는 다수의 RF 체인들을 포함할 수 있다. 나아가, 상기 RF처리부(1m-10)는 빔포밍을 수행할 수 있다. 상기 빔포밍을 위해, 상기 RF처리부(1m-10)는 다수의 안테나들 또는 안테나 요소들을 통해 송수신되는 신호들 각각의 위상 및 크기를 조절할 수 있다. 상기 RF 처리부는 하나 이상의 레이어를 전송함으로써 하향 MIMO 동작을 수행할 수 있다. The RF processing unit (1m-10) above performs functions for transmitting and receiving signals through a wireless channel, such as signal band conversion and amplification. That is, the RF processing unit (1m-10) up-converts a baseband signal provided from the baseband processing unit (1m-20) into an RF band signal and transmits it through an antenna, and down-converts an RF band signal received through the antenna into a baseband signal. For example, the RF processing unit (1m-10) may include a transmission filter, a reception filter, an amplifier, a mixer, an oscillator, a DAC, an ADC, etc. In the drawing, only one antenna is shown, but the first access node may have multiple antennas. In addition, the RF processing unit (1m-10) may include multiple RF chains. Furthermore, the RF processing unit (1m-10) may perform beamforming. For the above beamforming, the RF processing unit (1m-10) can adjust the phase and size of each signal transmitted and received through multiple antennas or antenna elements. The RF processing unit can perform a downward MIMO operation by transmitting one or more layers.

상기 기저대역처리부(1m-20)는 제1무선 접속 기술의 물리 계층 규격에 따라 기저대역 신호 및 비트열 간 변환 기능을 수행한다. 예를 들어, 데이터 송신 시, 상기 기저대역처리부(1m-20)은 송신 비트열을 부호화 및 변조함으로써 복소 심벌들을 생성한다. 또한, 데이터 수신 시, 상기 기저대역처리부(1m-20)은 상기 RF처리부(1m-10)로부터 제공되는 기저대역 신호를 복조 및 복호화를 통해 수신 비트열을 복원한다. 예를 들어, OFDM 방식에 따르는 경우, 데이터 송신 시, 상기 기저대역처리부(1m-20)은 송신 비트열을 부호화 및 변조함으로써 복소 심벌들을 생성하고, 상기 복소 심벌들을 부반송파들에 매핑한 후, IFFT 연산 및 CP 삽입을 통해 OFDM 심벌들을 구성한다. 또한, 데이터 수신 시, 상기 기저대역처리부(1m-20)은 상기 RF처리부(1m-10)로부터 제공되는 기저대역 신호를 OFDM 심벌 단위로 분할하고, FFT 연산을 통해 부반송파들에 매핑된 신호들을 복원한 후, 복조 및 복호화를 통해 수신 비트열을 복원한다. 상기 기저대역처리부(1m-20) 및 상기 RF처리부(1m-10)는 상술한 바와 같이 신호를 송신 및 수신한다. 이에 따라, 상기 기저대역처리부(1m-20) 및 상기 RF처리부(1m-10)는 송신부, 수신부, 송수신부, 통신부 또는 무선 통신부로 지칭될 수 있다.The above baseband processing unit (1m-20) performs a conversion function between a baseband signal and a bit stream according to the physical layer specifications of the first wireless access technology. For example, when transmitting data, the baseband processing unit (1m-20) encodes and modulates a transmission bit stream to generate complex symbols. In addition, when receiving data, the baseband processing unit (1m-20) restores a reception bit stream by demodulating and decoding a baseband signal provided from the RF processing unit (1m-10). For example, in the case of OFDM, when transmitting data, the baseband processing unit (1m-20) encodes and modulates a transmission bit stream to generate complex symbols, maps the complex symbols to subcarriers, and then configures OFDM symbols through IFFT operation and CP insertion. In addition, when receiving data, the baseband processing unit (1m-20) divides the baseband signal provided from the RF processing unit (1m-10) into OFDM symbol units, restores signals mapped to subcarriers through FFT operation, and then restores the received bit stream through demodulation and decoding. The baseband processing unit (1m-20) and the RF processing unit (1m-10) transmit and receive signals as described above. Accordingly, the baseband processing unit (1m-20) and the RF processing unit (1m-10) may be referred to as a transmitter, a receiver, a transceiver, a communication unit, or a wireless communication unit.

상기 백홀통신부(1m-30)는 네트워크 내 다른 노드들과 통신을 수행하기 위한 인터페이스를 제공한다. 즉, 상기 백홀통신부(1m-30)는 상기 주기지국에서 다른 노드, 예를 들어, 보조기지국, 코어망 등으로 송신되는 비트열을 물리적 신호로 변환하고, 상기 다른 노드로부터 수신되는 물리적 신호를 비트열로 변환한다.The above backhaul communication unit (1m-30) provides an interface for performing communication with other nodes within the network. That is, the backhaul communication unit (1m-30) converts a bit string transmitted from the main base station to another node, such as an auxiliary base station or core network, into a physical signal, and converts a physical signal received from the other node into a bit string.

상기 저장부(1m-40)는 상기 주기지국의 동작을 위한 기본 프로그램, 응용 프로그램, 설정 정보 등의 데이터를 저장한다. 특히, 상기 저장부(1m-40)는 접속된 단말에 할당된 베어러에 대한 정보, 접속된 단말로부터 보고된 측정 결과 등을 저장할 수 있다. 또한, 상기 저장부(1m-40)는 단말에게 다중 연결을 제공하거나, 중단할지 여부의 판단 기준이 되는 정보를 저장할 수 있다. 그리고, 상기 저장부(1m-40)는 상기 제어부(1m-50)의 요청에 따라 저장된 데이터를 제공한다.The above storage unit (1m-40) stores data such as basic programs, application programs, and setting information for the operation of the above base station. In particular, the storage unit (1m-40) can store information on bearers allocated to connected terminals, measurement results reported from connected terminals, and the like. In addition, the storage unit (1m-40) can store information that serves as a judgment criterion for whether to provide or terminate multiple connections to a terminal. In addition, the storage unit (1m-40) provides stored data according to a request from the control unit (1m-50).

상기 제어부(1m-50)는 상기 주기지국의 전반적인 동작들을 제어한다. 예를 들어, 상기 제어부(1m-50)는 상기 기저대역처리부(1m-20) 및 상기 RF처리부(1m-10)을 통해 또는 상기 백홀통신부(1m-30)을 통해 신호를 송수신한다. 또한, 상기 제어부(1m-50)는 상기 저장부(1m-40)에 데이터를 기록하고, 읽는다. 이를 위해, 상기 제어부(1m-50)는 적어도 하나의 프로세서를 포함할 수 있다. The above control unit (1m-50) controls the overall operations of the above base station. For example, the control unit (1m-50) transmits and receives signals through the baseband processing unit (1m-20) and the RF processing unit (1m-10) or through the backhaul communication unit (1m-30). In addition, the control unit (1m-50) records and reads data in the storage unit (1m-40). For this purpose, the control unit (1m-50) may include at least one processor.

상술한 본 개시의 구체적인 실시예들에서, 본 개시에 포함되는 구성 요소는 제시된 구체적인 실시예에 따라 단수 또는 복수로 표현되었다. 그러나, 단수 또는 복수의 표현은 설명의 편의를 위해 제시한 상황에 적합하게 선택된 것으로서, 본 개시가 단수 또는 복수의 구성 요소에 제한되는 것은 아니며, 복수로 표현된 구성 요소라 하더라도 단수로 구성되거나, 단수로 표현된 구성 요소라 하더라도 복수로 구성될 수 있다.In the specific embodiments of the present disclosure described above, the components included in the present disclosure are expressed in the singular or plural form according to the specific embodiments presented. However, the singular or plural expressions are selected to suit the presented situation for the convenience of explanation, and the present disclosure is not limited to the singular or plural components, and even if a component is expressed in the plural form, it may be composed of the singular form, or even if a component is expressed in the singular form, it may be composed of the plural form.

한편, 이상에서 설명된 본 명세서와 도면에 개시된 실시 예들은 본 발명의 내용을 쉽게 설명하고, 이해를 돕기 위해 특정 예를 제시한 것일 뿐이며, 본 발명의 범위를 한정하고자 하는 것은 아니다. 따라서 본 발명의 범위는 여기에 개시된 실시 예들 이외에도 본 발명의 기술적 사상을 바탕으로 도출되는 모든 변경 또는 변형된 형태가 본 발명의 범위에 포함되는 것으로 해석되어야 한다.Meanwhile, the embodiments disclosed in the specification and drawings described above are only specific examples presented to easily explain and aid understanding of the contents of the present invention, and are not intended to limit the scope of the present invention. Therefore, the scope of the present invention should be interpreted as including all changes or modified forms derived based on the technical idea of the present invention in addition to the embodiments disclosed herein.

Claims (14)

통신 시스템에서 단말의 방법에 있어서,In a terminal method in a communication system, 기지국으로부터, LTM(layer 1/layer 2 triggered mobility) 후보 설정에 대한 제1 정보를 포함하는 제1 무선 자원 제어(radio resource control, RRC) 메시지를 수신하는 단계;A step of receiving, from a base station, a first radio resource control (RRC) message including first information on LTM (layer 1/layer 2 triggered mobility) candidate setting; 상기 기지국으로부터, 상기 LTM 후보 설정에 대한 제2 정보를 포함하는 제2 RRC 메시지를 수신하는 단계; 및A step of receiving a second RRC message including second information about the LTM candidate setting from the base station; and 상기 기지국으로, 상기 제2 정보에 기반하여 후보 셀들에 대하여 수행된 L1(layer 1) 측정을 보고하는 단계를 포함하고,A step of reporting L1 (layer 1) measurements performed on candidate cells based on the second information to the base station, 상기 제2 정보는, 상기 LTM 후보 설정을 업데이트하는 RRC 설정을 포함하고,The second information includes an RRC setting for updating the LTM candidate setting, 상기 후보 셀들에 대한 셀그룹 설정 정보를 포함하는 상기 RRC 설정은, 상기 제1 RRC 메시지에 포함된 라디오 베어러 설정 또는 측정 설정 중 적어도 하나의 업데이트된 정보를 더 포함하는 것을 특징으로 하는 단말의 방법.A method of a terminal, characterized in that the RRC configuration including cell group configuration information for the candidate cells further includes updated information of at least one of a radio bearer configuration or a measurement configuration included in the first RRC message. 제1항에 있어서,In the first paragraph, 상기 제2 정보는, 상기 후보 셀들 각각에 대한 정보 및 상기 후보 셀들에 공통적으로 적용되는 기준 설정에 대한 정보를 포함하고,The second information includes information about each of the candidate cells and information about criteria settings that are commonly applied to the candidate cells. 상기 후보 셀들 각각에 대한 정보는, 후보 셀의 ID(identity) 및 상기 후보 셀에 대응되는 상기 RRC 설정을 포함하는 것을 특징으로 하는 단말의 방법.A terminal method, characterized in that the information for each of the above candidate cells includes an ID (identity) of the candidate cell and the RRC setting corresponding to the candidate cell. 제1항에 있어서,In the first paragraph, 상기 라디오 베어러 설정과 상기 측정 설정 중 적어도 하나의 업데이트된 정보는 상기 기지국의 CU(central unit)에 의하여 결정되고,At least one of the updated information of the above radio bearer setup and the above measurement setup is determined by the CU (central unit) of the base station, 상기 후보 셀들에 대한 셀그룹 설정 정보는, 상기 후보 셀들 각각에 의하여 생성되는 것을 특징으로 하는 단말의 방법.A terminal method, characterized in that cell group setting information for the above candidate cells is generated by each of the above candidate cells. 통신 시스템에서 기지국의 방법에 있어서,In a method of a base station in a communication system, 단말로, LTM(layer 1/layer 2 triggered mobility) 후보 설정에 대한 제1 정보를 포함하는 제1 무선 자원 제어(radio resource control, RRC) 메시지를 전송하는 단계;A step of transmitting, to a terminal, a first radio resource control (RRC) message including first information on LTM (layer 1/layer 2 triggered mobility) candidate setting; 상기 LTM 후보 설정을 업데이트하는 RRC 설정을 획득하는 단계;A step of obtaining RRC settings for updating the above LTM candidate settings; 상기 단말로, 상기 RRC 설정을 포함하는, 상기 LTM 후보 설정에 대한 제2 정보를 포함하는 제2 RRC 메시지를 전송하는 단계; 및A step of transmitting a second RRC message including second information about the LTM candidate settings, including the RRC settings, to the terminal; and 상기 단말로부터, 상기 제2 정보에 기반하여 후보 셀들에 대한 L1(layer 1) 측정 보고를 수신하는 단계를 포함하고,A step of receiving an L1 (layer 1) measurement report for candidate cells based on the second information from the terminal, 상기 후보 셀들에 대한 셀그룹 설정 정보를 포함하는 상기 RRC 설정은, 상기 제1 RRC 메시지에 포함된 라디오 베어러 설정 또는 측정 설정 중 적어도 하나의 업데이트된 정보를 더 포함하는 것을 특징으로 하는 기지국의 방법.A method of a base station, characterized in that the RRC configuration including cell group configuration information for the candidate cells further includes updated information of at least one of a radio bearer configuration or a measurement configuration included in the first RRC message. 제4항에 있어서,In paragraph 4, 상기 제2 정보는, 상기 후보 셀들 각각에 대한 정보 및 상기 후보 셀들에 공통적으로 적용되는 기준 설정에 대한 정보를 포함하고,The second information includes information about each of the candidate cells and information about criteria settings that are commonly applied to the candidate cells. 상기 후보 셀들 각각에 대한 정보는, 후보 셀의 ID(identity) 및 상기 후보 셀에 대응되는 상기 RRC 설정을 포함하는 것을 특징으로 하는 기지국의 방법.A method of a base station, characterized in that the information for each of the above candidate cells includes an ID (identity) of the candidate cell and the RRC setting corresponding to the candidate cell. 제4항에 있어서, 상기 RRC 설정을 획득하는 단계는, In the fourth paragraph, the step of obtaining the RRC settings comprises: 상기 라디오 베어러 설정과 상기 측정 설정 중 적어도 하나의 업데이트된 정보를 생성하는 단계를 포함하는 것을 특징으로 하는 기지국의 방법.A method of a base station, characterized by comprising a step of generating updated information of at least one of the radio bearer setup and the measurement setup. 제4항에 있어서, 상기 RRC 설정을 획득하는 단계는, In the fourth paragraph, the step of obtaining the RRC settings comprises: 상기 기지국의 CU(central unit)가 F1 인터페이스를 통하여 후보 셀들 각각으로, 핸드오버를 위한 설정 정보를 요청하는 메시지를 전송하는 단계; 및A step in which the CU (central unit) of the above base station transmits a message requesting setup information for handover to each of the candidate cells through the F1 interface; and 상기 F1 인터페이스를 통하여 상기 후보 셀들 각각으로부터, 상기 메시지에 기반하여 상기 후보 셀들 각각에 의하여 생성된 셀그룹 설정 정보를 수신하는 단계를 포함하는 것을 특징으로 하는 기지국의 방법.A method of a base station, characterized by comprising a step of receiving cell group configuration information generated by each of the candidate cells based on the message from each of the candidate cells through the F1 interface. 통신 시스템에서 단말에 있어서,In a terminal in a communication system, 송수신부; 및Transmitter and receiver; and 기지국으로부터, LTM(layer 1/layer 2 triggered mobility) 후보 설정에 대한 제1 정보를 포함하는 제1 무선 자원 제어(radio resource control, RRC) 메시지를 수신하도록 상기 송수신부를 제어하고, 상기 기지국으로부터, 상기 LTM 후보 설정에 대한 제2 정보를 포함하는 제2 RRC 메시지를 수신하도록 상기 송수신부를 제어하며, 및 상기 기지국으로, 상기 제2 정보에 기반하여 후보 셀들에 대하여 수행된 L1(layer 1) 측정을 보고하도록 상기 송수신부를 제어하는 제어부를 포함하고,A control unit configured to control the transceiver to receive, from a base station, a first radio resource control (RRC) message including first information about LTM (layer 1/layer 2 triggered mobility) candidate configuration, control the transceiver to receive, from the base station, a second RRC message including second information about the LTM candidate configuration, and control the transceiver to report, to the base station, L1 (layer 1) measurements performed on candidate cells based on the second information. 상기 제2 정보는, 상기 LTM 후보 설정을 업데이트하는 RRC 설정을 포함하고,The second information includes an RRC setting for updating the LTM candidate setting, 상기 후보 셀들에 대한 셀그룹 설정 정보를 포함하는 상기 RRC 설정은, 상기 제1 RRC 메시지에 포함된 라디오 베어러 설정 또는 측정 설정 중 적어도 하나의 업데이트된 정보를 더 포함하는 것을 특징으로 하는 단말.A terminal characterized in that the RRC configuration including cell group configuration information for the candidate cells further includes updated information of at least one of a radio bearer configuration or a measurement configuration included in the first RRC message. 제8항에 있어서,In Article 8, 상기 제2 정보는, 상기 후보 셀들 각각에 대한 정보 및 상기 후보 셀들에 공통적으로 적용되는 기준 설정에 대한 정보를 포함하고,The second information includes information about each of the candidate cells and information about criteria settings that are commonly applied to the candidate cells. 상기 후보 셀들 각각에 대한 정보는, 후보 셀의 ID(identity) 및 상기 후보 셀에 대응되는 상기 RRC 설정을 포함하는 것을 특징으로 하는 단말.A terminal characterized in that the information for each of the above candidate cells includes an ID (identity) of the candidate cell and the RRC setting corresponding to the candidate cell. 제8항에 있어서,In Article 8, 상기 라디오 베어러 설정과 상기 측정 설정 중 적어도 하나의 업데이트된 정보는 상기 기지국의 CU(central unit)에 의하여 결정되고,At least one of the updated information of the above radio bearer setup and the above measurement setup is determined by the CU (central unit) of the base station, 상기 후보 셀들에 대한 셀그룹 설정 정보는, 상기 후보 셀들 각각에 의하여 생성되는 것을 특징으로 하는 단말.A terminal characterized in that cell group setting information for the above candidate cells is generated by each of the above candidate cells. 통신 시스템에서 기지국에 있어서,In a base station in a communication system, 송수신부; 및Transmitter and receiver; and 단말로, LTM(layer 1/layer 2 triggered mobility) 후보 설정에 대한 제1 정보를 포함하는 제1 무선 자원 제어(radio resource control, RRC) 메시지를 전송하도록 상기 송수신부를 제어하고, 상기 LTM 후보 설정을 업데이트하는 RRC 설정을 획득하며, 상기 단말로, 상기 RRC 설정을 포함하는, 상기 LTM 후보 설정에 대한 제2 정보를 포함하는 제2 RRC 메시지를 전송하도록 상기 송수신부를 제어하고, 및 상기 단말로부터, 상기 제2 정보에 기반하여 후보 셀들에 대한 L1(layer 1) 측정 보고를 수신하도록 상기 송수신부를 제어하는 제어부를 포함하고,A control unit configured to control the transceiver to transmit, to a terminal, a first radio resource control (RRC) message including first information about LTM (layer 1/layer 2 triggered mobility) candidate settings, obtain an RRC setting for updating the LTM candidate settings, control the transceiver to transmit, to the terminal, a second RRC message including second information about the LTM candidate settings, including the RRC setting, and control the transceiver to receive, from the terminal, an L1 (layer 1) measurement report for candidate cells based on the second information. 상기 후보 셀들에 대한 셀그룹 설정 정보를 포함하는 상기 RRC 설정은, 상기 제1 RRC 메시지에 포함된 라디오 베어러 설정 또는 측정 설정 중 적어도 하나의 업데이트된 정보를 더 포함하는 것을 특징으로 하는 기지국.A base station, characterized in that the RRC configuration including cell group configuration information for the candidate cells further includes updated information of at least one of a radio bearer configuration or a measurement configuration included in the first RRC message. 제11항에 있어서,In Article 11, 상기 제2 정보는, 상기 후보 셀들 각각에 대한 정보 및 상기 후보 셀들에 공통적으로 적용되는 기준 설정에 대한 정보를 포함하고,The second information includes information about each of the candidate cells and information about criteria settings that are commonly applied to the candidate cells. 상기 후보 셀들 각각에 대한 정보는, 후보 셀의 ID(identity) 및 상기 후보 셀에 대응되는 상기 RRC 설정을 포함하는 것을 특징으로 하는 기지국.A base station, characterized in that the information for each of the candidate cells includes an ID (identity) of the candidate cell and the RRC settings corresponding to the candidate cell. 제11항에 있어서, In Article 11, 상기 제어부는, 상기 라디오 베어러 설정과 상기 측정 설정 중 적어도 하나의 업데이트된 정보를 생성하는 것을 특징으로 하는 기지국.A base station, characterized in that the control unit generates updated information of at least one of the radio bearer settings and the measurement settings. 제11항에 있어서, In Article 11, 상기 제어부는, 상기 기지국의 CU(central unit)가 F1 인터페이스를 통하여 후보 셀들 각각으로, 핸드오버를 위한 설정 정보를 요청하는 메시지를 전송하도록 상기 송수신부를 제어하고, 및 상기 F1 인터페이스를 통하여 상기 후보 셀들 각각으로부터, 상기 메시지에 기반하여 상기 후보 셀들 각각에 의하여 생성된 셀그룹 설정 정보를 수신하도록 상기 송수신부를 제어하는 것을 특징으로 하는 기지국.A base station, characterized in that the control unit controls the transceiver to transmit a message requesting setup information for handover to each of the candidate cells through the F1 interface from the CU (central unit) of the base station, and controls the transceiver to receive cell group setup information generated by each of the candidate cells based on the message from each of the candidate cells through the F1 interface.
PCT/KR2024/095075 2023-02-10 2024-02-05 Method and apparatus for efficiently transmitting configuration information of candidate cells for l1/l2-based mobility support in next-generation mobile communication system Ceased WO2024167378A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
KR1020230017838A KR20240125151A (en) 2023-02-10 2023-02-10 Method and apparatus of supporting the efficient configuration of the candidate cells for l1/l2 triggered mobility in the next communication system
KR10-2023-0017838 2023-02-10

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2024167378A1 true WO2024167378A1 (en) 2024-08-15

Family

ID=92263213

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/KR2024/095075 Ceased WO2024167378A1 (en) 2023-02-10 2024-02-05 Method and apparatus for efficiently transmitting configuration information of candidate cells for l1/l2-based mobility support in next-generation mobile communication system

Country Status (2)

Country Link
KR (1) KR20240125151A (en)
WO (1) WO2024167378A1 (en)

Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20220046510A1 (en) * 2020-07-24 2022-02-10 Asustek Computer Inc. Method and apparatus for mobility procedure in a wireless communication system
US20220386203A1 (en) * 2019-03-29 2022-12-01 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. User equipment-centric inter-cell mobility

Patent Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20220386203A1 (en) * 2019-03-29 2022-12-01 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. User equipment-centric inter-cell mobility
US20220046510A1 (en) * 2020-07-24 2022-02-10 Asustek Computer Inc. Method and apparatus for mobility procedure in a wireless communication system

Non-Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
BRIAN MARTIN, INTERDIGITAL, INC.: "LTM Overall Procedure", 3GPP TSG RAN WG2 #120, R2-2212292, 3 November 2022 (2022-11-03), XP052216376 *
LI-CHUAN TSENG, MEDIATEK INC.: "RRC Aspects of L1L2-triggered Mobility", 3GPP TSG-RAN WG2 MEETING #120, R2-2211196, 4 November 2022 (2022-11-04), XP052215308 *
RUI ZHOU, CATT: "On Procedure Descriptions", 3GPP TSG-RAN WG2 MEETING #120, R2-2211202, 4 November 2022 (2022-11-04), XP052215314 *

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
KR20240125151A (en) 2024-08-19

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2024172426A1 (en) Method and device for performing handover in wireless communication system
WO2022240104A1 (en) Method and device for supporting inter-cell movement based on l1 and l2 in wireless communication system
WO2025071064A1 (en) Method and apparatus of performing ue based uplink timing adjustment for layer 1/2 triggered mobility in the next communication systems
WO2021215884A1 (en) Method and device for transmitting and receiving signals in wireless communication system
WO2024158195A1 (en) Method and device for access to non-anchor network energy saving (nes) cell in next generation mobile communication system
WO2023282623A1 (en) Method and device for activating pdcch reception beam for multiple carriers simultaneously in mobile communication system
WO2024232717A1 (en) Method and device for overcoming beam failure in next-generation mobile communication system
WO2023068730A1 (en) Method and apparatus for managing slice based cell reselection priorities in wireless communication system
WO2023075436A1 (en) Method and apparatus for negotiating user equipment capability of user equipment having plurality of usims in next-generation mobile communication system
WO2024167378A1 (en) Method and apparatus for efficiently transmitting configuration information of candidate cells for l1/l2-based mobility support in next-generation mobile communication system
WO2022086136A1 (en) Method and device for transmitting and receiving slice information for handover in wireless communication system
WO2024128805A1 (en) Method and apparatus for managing pscell mobility history information in next-generation mobile communication system
WO2024237692A1 (en) Method and device for determining measurement sequence for frequencies according to base station configuration in next generation mobile communication system
WO2025023677A1 (en) Method and device for operating uplink time adjustment timer during l1/l2-based handover in mobile communication system
WO2025155125A1 (en) Method and device for determining l1-based handover according to performance of serving cell in next generation mobile communication system
WO2024029957A1 (en) Method and apparatus for performing conditional pscell addition and change continuously in wireless communication system
WO2025095609A1 (en) Method and apparatus for reporting enhanced early measurement result in next generation mobile communication system
WO2025183498A1 (en) Apparatus and method for measurement and report of physical layer reference signal in next-generation mobile communication system
WO2024172591A1 (en) Method and apparatus of configuring and signaling multiple measurement report triggering events in communication system
WO2024096622A1 (en) Method and device for simultaneously transmitting configurations for adding and changing conditional pscell in next-generation mobile communication system
WO2024232738A1 (en) Method and device for performing handover without random access for moving integrated access and backhaul system in next-generation mobile communication system
WO2024205366A1 (en) Method and device for providing additional measurement information for carrier aggregation in wireless communication system
WO2024196125A1 (en) Method and device for processing configuration information of lower layer triggered mobility in wireless communication system
WO2025023672A1 (en) Method and device for performing handover in wireless communication system
WO2024205228A1 (en) Method and apparatus pertaining to altitude-specific measurement configuration and signaling in communication system

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 24753699

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE